Opel Insignia Owners & Service Manuals

Opel Insignia: Diagnostic Information and Procedures

DTC B1395

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B1395 03

Control Module Voltage Reference Output 1 Circuit Low Voltage

DTC B1395 07

Control Module Voltage Reference Output 1 Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Interior Backlighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The instrument panel dimmer switch is used to increase and decrease the brightness of the interior backlighting components. The instrument panel dimmer switch provides a voltage signal to the body control module (BCM) that will increase as the brightness of the lights are increased and decrease as the brightness of the lights are decreased. The BCM provides a low reference, signal, and B+ voltage reference to the instrument panel dimmer switch. When the instrument panel dimmer switch is placed in the desired position, the dimmed voltage setting is applied from the instrument panel dimmer switch through the instrument panel dimmer switch signal circuit to the BCM. The BCM interprets the signal and applies a pulse width modulated voltage through the LED dimming 1 and dimming 2 control circuits illuminating the interior backlighting to the requested level of brightness.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Park Lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B1395 03

  • The BCM detects a short to ground in the instrument panel dimmer switch B+ reference circuit.
  • The BCM detects a short to ground in the instrument panel dimmer switch signal circuit.

DTC B1395 07

  • The BCM detects a short to voltage in the instrument panel dimmer switch B+ reference circuit.
  • The BCM detects a short to voltage in the instrument panel dimmer switch signal circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will not dim any interior backlighting. All interior backlighting will default to the FULL bright.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch, ignition ON.

2. Test for B+ between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.

  • If less than B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

3. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between B+ and the signal circuit terminal 11.

  • If the test lamp illuminates
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate

4. Test for B+ between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and the signal circuit terminal 11.

  • If less than B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

5. Test for B+ between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and the low reference circuit terminal 7.

  • If less than B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit terminal 7 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

6. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.

  • If the test lamp illuminates
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate

7. Test or replace the S30 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B1480

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B1480 02

Battery Rundown Protection Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Courtesy Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies battery voltage to the front and rear reading lamps, left and right sunshade lamps, center console compartment lamp, and instrument panel compartment lamp via the courtesy lamp control circuit. When the instrument panel compartment, center console armrest, or a sunshade mirror is opened, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow illuminating the respective lamps. The front and rear reading lamps are controlled by individual switches that are activated by the occupants when additional cabin lighting is required. In the event that any of these courtesy lamps were to remain illuminated for more than 10 min with the ignition switch in the OFF position, the BCM will deactivate the courtesy lamp control circuit to prevent total battery discharge.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the courtesy lamps control circuit terminal 3 X7.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The BCM will disable the control circuit and all lamps controlled by the courtesy lamps control circuit terminal 3 X7 will be inoperative.
  • Dome lamps inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the components listed below.

  • A3L Sunshade - Left
  • A3R Sunshade - Right
  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail (C3U)
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail (C3U)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (C93-C3U)

2. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • A3L Sunshade - Left terminal A
  • A3R Sunshade - Right terminal A
  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 7
  • E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp terminal 1
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail terminal 1 (C3U)
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail terminal 1 (C3U)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 4 (C93-C3U)

3. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Inadvertent Load ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

4. Test or replace the courtesy lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Center Reading Lamp Replacement (without Sunroof)
  • Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Seat Position Center Reading Lamp Replacement (with Sunroof)
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Sunshade Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2530

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2530 02

Front Fog Lamps Control Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Front Fog Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The front fog lamp relay is supplied with battery voltage at all times. The front fog lamp switch signal circuit is grounded momentarily by pressing the front fog lamp switch. The body control module (BCM) energizes the front fog lamp relay by applying ground to the front fog lamp relay control circuit. When the front fog lamp relay is energized, the relay switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied to the front fog lamp control circuit which illuminates the front fog lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Front fog lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the front fog lamp relay control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The front fog lamps will not operate when the park lamps are ON and the front fog lamp switch is active.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Fog Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

NOTE: The test lamp in the following step will illuminate at LOW intensity.

This is normal circuit operation and does not indicate a circuit malfunction.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect a 3 A fused jumper between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.

4. Remove the F7UA fog lamp fuse at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.

5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the F7UA fog lamp fuse B+ switch control terminal and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

6. Test or replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2545

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2545 02

Backup Lamps Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B2545 04

Backup Lamps Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Backup Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

With the engine running and the transmission in the reverse position, the transmission control module (TCM) sends a serial data message to the body control module (BCM). The message indicates that the gear selector is in the reverse position. The BCM applies battery voltage to the backup lamps control circuit illuminating the backup lamps. Once the driver moves the gear selector out of the reverse position, a message is sent by the TCM via serial data requesting the BCM to remove battery voltage from the backup lamps control circuit. The engine must be running for the backup lamps to operate.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Engine RUNNING.
  • Transmission placed in REVERSE gear.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2545 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the backup lamps control circuit.

DTC B2545 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the backup lamps control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The backup lamps will not operate.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics
  • Body Control System Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E5 Backup Lamp. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Backup Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E5 Backup Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B255D

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B255D 02

Passenger Compartment Lamp Control 2 Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Interior Accent Lighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies battery voltage to accent lamps via the accent lamp control circuit. When a door is opened the BCM applies battery voltage to the accent lamp control circuit illuminating the driver and passenger door accent lamps. The accent lamps will remain illuminated until all doors are closed and the ignition is OFF.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the accent lamp control circuit terminal 23 X1

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will disable the accent lamp control circuit.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector the E1W Accent Lamp - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Accent Lighting ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E1W Accent Lamp - Instrument Panel.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

Instrument Panel Center Trim Plate Applique Replacement for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B255F

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B255F 02

Interior Door Handle Backlight Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Interior Accent Lighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies battery voltage to accent lighting lamps via the accent lamp control circuit. When a door is opened the BCM applies battery voltage to the accent lamp control circuit illuminating all of the accent lighting. The accent lighting will remain illuminated until all doors are closed and the ignition is OFF. The accent lighting remains illuminated with the ignition ON.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B255F 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the accent lamp control circuit terminal 22 X7.

DTC B255F 04

The BCM detects a short to voltage or an open/high resistance in the accent lamp control circuit terminal 22 X7.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will disable the accent lamp control circuit.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the component with the inoperative LED backlighting. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Accent Lighting 1 ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the accent lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Front Side Door Map Pocket Illumination Lamp Replacement
  • Front Side Door Inside Handle Illumination Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Side Door Inside Handle Illumination Lamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B256C or B256D

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B256C 00

Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Incorrect Vehicle Identification Number

DTC B256D 00

Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Incorrect Vehicle Identification Number

Circuit/System Description

The left and right headlamp assemblies each contain a K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module. Both K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Modules store the 10 - 17 digits of the vehicles identification number to memory. The K26 Headlamp Control Module compares the vehicles VIN to the 10 - 17 digits of the VIN stored in both K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Modules. If either of the VIN's stored do not match, the K26 Headlamp Control Module will set either DTC B256C or B256D depending on what K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Modules VIN stored does not match. The driver will be notified with an "Advanced Front Lighting System Fault" message displayed on the driver information center.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • High beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B256C 00

The K26 Headlamp Control Module detects and invalid VIN in the K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left.

DTC B256D 00

The K26 Headlamp Control Module detects and invalid VIN in the K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The high beam headlamps are inoperative.
  • The driver information center will display "Advanced Front Lighting System Fault."

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify no other DTC's are set.

  • If any other DTC's are set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle.

  • Go to next step: If no other DTCs are set

3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B256C or B256D is not set.

  • If DTC B256C or B256D is set
  1. Program the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Verify DTC B256C or B256D is not set.
  • If DTC B256C or B256D is set

Replace the appropriate K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module.

  • Go to next step: If DTC B256C or B256D is not set

Go to next step: All OK.

  • Go to next step: If DTC B256C or B256D is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module or Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B2570

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2570 02

Trunk Lamp Control Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Rear Compartment Lamp Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) applies battery voltage to the rear compartment courtesy lamp through the rear compartment lamp control circuit. When the BCM receives a rear compartment lid open input from the rear compartment lid latch, the BCM applies battery voltage to the rear compartment lamp control circuit illuminating the rear compartment courtesy lamp. In the event that the rear compartment lamp were to remain illuminated for more than 10 minutes with the ignition switch in the OFF position and no doors opened, the BCM will deactivate the rear compartment lamp control circuit to prevent total battery discharge.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Rear compartment OPEN.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground on the rear compartment courtesy lamp control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The rear compartment lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, trunk latch latched, disconnect the harness connector at the E8S rear compartment courtesy lamp.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Trunk Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 body control module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 body control module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 body control module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 body control module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E8S rear compartment courtesy lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Rear Compartment Courtesy Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear Compartment Courtesy Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2575 or B2699

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2575 02

Headlamps Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B2699 02

Right Headlamp Control Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

With the headlamp switch in the ON position, the headlamp switch headlamp ON signal circuit is grounded through the headlamp switch. The body control module (BCM) responds by applying battery positive voltage to the left and right low beam headlamp control circuits illuminating the low beam headlamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Low beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2575 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the left low beam headlamp control circuit.

DTC B2699 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the right low beam headlamp control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • When DTC B2575 sets, the left low beam headlamp will be inoperative.
  • When DTC B2699 sets, the right low beam headlamp will be inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

DTC B2575

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, remove the E4G Headlamp - Left Low Beam. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Left Headlamp Low Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E4G Headlamp - Left Low Beam.

DTC B2699

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, remove the E4H Headlamp - Right Low Beam. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Right Headlamp Low Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E4H Headlamp - Right Low Beam.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Left Side (High Beam) Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Left Side (Low Beam)
  • Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Right Side (High Beam) Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Right Side (Low Beam)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B257A

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B257A 00

Headlamp Switch Input Signals Correlation Malfunction

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction
2. Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

For headlamp operation, the body control module (BCM) monitors three signal circuits from the headlamp switch. When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position, the three signal circuits are unaffected and the BCM relies on the ambient light sensor input to turn the headlamps and daytime running lamps ON and OFF. When the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit is grounded, indicating to the BCM that the exterior lamps should be turned OFF. With the headlamp switch in the PARK LAMPS position, the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit is grounded, indicating that the park lamps have been requested. When the headlamp switch is in the HEADLAMP position, both the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit and the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit are grounded. The BCM responds by commanding the park lamps and headlamps ON.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

  • The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit.
  • The BCM detects a short to ground in the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit.
  • The BCM detects a short to ground in the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • When DTC B257A 00 is present on the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit, the low beam headlamps are always ON in the AUTO position. The headlamp switch operates in all positions other than AUTO. The AUTO headlamp defeat is inoperative.
  • When DTC B257A 00 is present on the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit, the low beam headlamps are always ON. The BCM disregards all headlamp switch inputs.
  • When DTC B257A 00 is present on the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit, the park lamps and low beam headlamps are inoperative in the PARK and HEAD positions. Headlamps and park lamps operate in AUTO position.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Automatic Headlamps Disable Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Automatic Headlamps Disable Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

8. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.

9. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

10. Verify the scan tool Headlamps On Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

11. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.

12. Verify the scan tool Headlamps On Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Go to next step: If Active

13. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B257C or B257D

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B257C 00

Left Headlamp Assembly Malfunction

DTC B257D 00

Right Headlamp Assembly Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The headlamp control module calculates the headlamp angle and sends commands to the left and right adaptive forward lighting system headlamp actuators. The headlamp actuators drive the headlamps to the position commanded by the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module monitors the headlamp actuator motor control circuits for proper circuit continuity and for shorts to ground or voltage. If a malfunction is detected, a DTC will be stored in memory and the driver will be notified with a "Service AFL Lamp" message displayed over the driver information center located on the instrument cluster.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Engine RUNNING.
  • Headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B257C 00

The headlamp control module receives a serial data message from the left headlamp internal logic module that an internal headlamp malfunction has occurred.

DTC B257D 00

The headlamp control module receives a serial data message from the right headlamp internal logic module that an internal headlamp malfunction has occurred.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The headlamp control module disables the AFL system.
  • The driver information center will display AFL Lamps Need Service.
  • On vehicles equipped with both AFL and headlamp leveling, the headlamp leveling system will remain active.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

DTC B257C and B257D will set when there is an internal malfunction within the left or right headlamp assemblies. No parts are serviceable within the headlamp assemblies so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B257C or B257D is not set.

  • If DTC B257C or B257D is set
  1. Program the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Verify the DTC does not set.
    • If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.
    • Go to next step: If the DTC does not set
  3. All OK.
  • Go to next step: If DTC B257C or B257D is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Leveling Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2580 (T4A)

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2580 01

Headlamp High Beam Control Circuit Short to Battery

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The high beam and flash to pass functions are contained within the turn signal/multifunction switch. The BCM provides the turn signal/multifunction switch with two signal circuits, the high beam signal circuit and the flash to pass signal circuit. When the low beam headlamps are ON and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, ground is applied to the BCM through the high beam signal circuit. The BCM responds to the high beam request by applying ground to the high beam relay control circuit which energizes the high beam relay. With the high beam relay energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the high beam fuses to the high beam control circuits illuminating the high beam headlamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • High beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the headlamp high beam relay control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The high beam headlamps and flash to pass will not operate.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

NOTE: The test lamp in the following step will illuminate at LOW intensity.

This is normal circuit operation and does not indicate a circuit malfunction.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 18 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect a 3 A fused jumper between the control circuit terminal 18 and ground, ignition ON, low beams ON.

4. Verify the high beam headlamps illuminate.

  • If the high beam headlamps do not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 18 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the high beam headlamps illuminate

5. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2580 or B3866 (T4L)

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2580 00

Left High Beam Control Circuit Malfunction

DTC B3866 00

Right High Beam Control Circuit Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The high beam and flash to pass functions are contained within the turn signal/multifunction switch. The body control module (BCM) provides the turn signal/multifunction switch with two signal circuits, the high beam signal circuit and flash to pass signal circuit. When the low beam headlamps are ON and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, ground is applied to the BCM through the high beam signal circuit. The BCM responds to the high beam request by sending a message via high speed bus to the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module then communicates via private CAN bus with the left and right high beam control modules to illuminate the high beam LEDs.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • High beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2580 00

The left headlamp high beam control module detects an internal malfunction in the left high beam control circuit.

DTC B3866 00

The right headlamp high beam control module detects an internal malfunction in the right high beam control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The driver information center will display Advanced Front Lighting System Fault.
  • One or more high beam LEDs are inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

DTC B2580 or B3866 will set when one or more of the left or right high beam LEDs are inoperative. No parts are serviceable within the headlamp assemblies so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. The appropriate K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module, K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module, and K166 Multifunction LED Control Module may be reused when replacing the headlamp assembly.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B2580 00 or B3866 00 is not set.

  • If DTC B2580 00 or B3866 00 is set
  1. Replace the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.
  • Go to next step: If DTC B2580 00 or B3866 00 is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement

DTC B2585 or B3867

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2585 02

Left Park Lamps Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B2585 04

Left Park Lamps Control Circuit Open

DTC B3867 02

Right Park Lamps Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3867 04

Right Park Lamps Control Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

When the headlamp switch is placed in the HEAD or PARK position, ground is applied to the park lamp switch ON signal circuit to the body control module (BCM). The BCM responds by applying voltage to the park lamps, tail lamps, and license lamps control circuits illuminating the park, tail, and license lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Park lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2585 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the left park lamps control circuit terminal 6 X4.

DTC B2585 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the left park lamps control circuit terminal 6 X4.

DTC B3867 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the right park lamps control circuit terminal 5 X4.

DTC B3867 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the right park lamps control circuit terminal 5 X4.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

DTC B2585 02 and B2585 04

The left park lamps are always OFF.

DTC B3867 02 and B3867 04

The right park lamps are always OFF.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

The following control modules located on each headlamp assembly are serviceable.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K26L Headlamp Control Module - Left
  • K26R Headlamp Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

DTC B2585

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left
  • E2LF Side Market Lamp - Left Front
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left
  • E43L Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Left

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 1 (with T4L)
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 2 (with T4A)
  • E2LF Side Market Lamp - Left Front terminal 2
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • E43L Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • E2LF Side Market Lamp - Left Front terminal 1
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 1
  • E43L Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 1

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Left Park Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the park lamp.

DTC B3867

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right
  • E2RF Side Market Lamp - Right Front
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right
  • E43R Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Right

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 1 (with T4L)
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 2 (with T4A)
  • E2RF Side Market Lamp - Right Front terminal 2
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • E43R Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • E2RF Side Market Lamp - Right Front terminal 1
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 1
  • E43R Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 1

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Right Park Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the park lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Rear License Plate Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear Body Structure
  • Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B258A (TT4)

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B258A 01

Low Beam Control Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B258A 02

Low Beam Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B258A 04

Low Beam Control Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

* Right/Left Headlamp Low Beam Always ON
** Right/Left Headlamp Low Beam Always OFF

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) switches the headlamp low beams ON as soon it receives a signal from the headlamp switch or ambient light sensor. When this signal is received by the BCM, it applies a voltage trough the low beam relay and the low beam supply circuits which illuminates the low beams.

Conditions for Running the DTC

B258A 01 or B258A 02

The headlamp switch in OFF or AUTO position.

B258A 04

The headlamp switch in low beam position.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B258A 01

The BCM detects a short to battery on the control circuit.

B258A 02

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

B258A 04

The BCM detects an open control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

Headlamp low beam malfunction.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the appropriate Headlamp Low Beam Command test. The appropriate low beam lamp should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the KR49 Headlamp Low Beam Relay.

2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit of KR49 Headlamp Low Beam Relay terminal 30 and ground.

3. Command the Headlamp Low Beam Command ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

4. Remove test lamp and reconnect the KR49 Headlamp Low Beam Relay.

5. Disconnect the connect harness of the appropriate headlamp. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 3 and ground.

6. Command the Headlamp Low Beam Command ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the KR49 Headlamp Low Beam Relay.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the KR49 Headlamp Low Beam Relay.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC B258A (TT6, TT2)

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B258A 01

Low Beam Control Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B258A 02

Low Beam Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B258A 04

Low Beam Control Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

* Right/Left Headlamp Low Beam Always ON
** Right/Left Headlamp Low Beam Always OFF

Circuit/System Description

The headlamp low beam relay is supplied with battery voltage at all times. The headlamp switch signal circuit is grounded by turning the headlamp switch. The body control module (BCM) energizes the headlamp low beam relay by applying ground to the headlamp low beam relay control circuit. When the headlamp low beam relay is energized, the relay switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied through the low beam lamp fuses to the low beam lamp supply voltage circuit which illuminates the low beam lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

B258A 01 or B258A 04

The headlamp switch in low beam position.

B258A 02

The headlamp switch in OFF or AUTO position.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B258A 01

The BCM detects a short to battery on the control circuit.

B258A 02

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

B258A 04

The BCM detects an open control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

Headlamp low beam malfunction.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the appropriate Headlamp Low Beam Command test. The appropriate low beam lamp should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood Primary.

2. Connect a test lamp between the B+ and the control circuit X50A Fuse Block - Underhood Primary terminal 24 X2.

3. Command the Low Beam Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

4. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood Primary.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
  • Control Module References

DTC B258A or B258E

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B258A 00

Left Low Beam Control Circuit Malfunction

DTC B258E 00

Right Low Beam Control Circuit Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) monitors three signal circuits from the headlamp switch. When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position, all three signal circuits are open. When placed in the AUTO position, the BCM monitors inputs from the ambient light sensor to determine if headlamps are required or if daytime running lamps will be activated based on outside lighting conditions. When the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit is grounded, indicating to the BCM that the exterior lamps should be turned OFF. With the headlamp switch in the PARK position, the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit is grounded, indicating that the park lamps have been requested. When the headlamp switch is placed in the HEADLAMP position, both the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit and the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit are grounded. The BCM responds to the low beam request by applying ground to the left and right low beam relay control circuits, which energize the left and right low beam relays. With the left and right low beam relays energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the low beam fuses to the left and right low beam control modules, which illuminate the low beam LEDs.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Low beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B258A 00

The left headlamp low beam control module detects an internal malfunction in the left low beam control circuit.

DTC B258E 00

The right headlamp low beam control module detects an internal malfunction in the right low beam control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • One or more of the low beam LEDs are inoperative.
  • The driver information center will display Failure Low Beam on Left Headlamp or Failure Low Beam on Right Headlamp.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

DTC B258A or B258E will set when one or more of the left or right low beam LEDs are inoperative. No parts are serviceable within the headlamp assemblies so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. The appropriate K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module, K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module, and K166 Multifunction LED Control Module may be reused when replacing the headlamp assembly.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B258A 00 or B258E 00 is not set.

  • If DTC B258A 00 or B258E 00 is set
  1. Replace the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.
  • Go to next step: If DTC B258A 00 or B258E 00 is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement

DTC B2590 or B2595

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2590 00

Left Cornering Lamp Circuit Malfunction

DTC B2590 54

Left Cornering Lamp Circuit High Temperature

DTC B2595 00

Right Cornering Lamp Circuit Malfunction

DTC B2595 54

Right Cornering Lamp Circuit High Temperature

Circuit/System Description

The cornering lamps are activated automatically at vehicle speeds below 40 km/h (25 MPH) when the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in either the turn left or turn right positions and/or when the steering angle is changed from the straight-ahead position towards the side the vehicle is turning. When the headlamp control module detects that one of these operations has occurred, the headlamp control module sends a message via serial data to the left or right headlamp/cornering lamp control module. The appropriate headlamp/cornering lamp control module responds by applying battery voltage to the appropriate cornering lamp LED to illuminate the area that the vehicle is turning. The cornering lamps are deactivated automatically when the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the neutral position and/or the steering angle has returned in the straight-ahead position. The cornering lamps will not operate at vehicle speeds above 40 km/h (25 MPH).

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Ignition ON.
  • Front fog lamps OFF.
  • Cornering lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2590 00

The headlamp/cornering lamp control module - left detects an internal malfunction in the left cornering lamp circuit.

DTC B2590 54

The headlamp/cornering lamp control module - left detects an invalid temperature in the left cornering lamp circuit.

DTC B2595 00

The headlamp/cornering lamp control module - right detects an internal malfunction in the right cornering lamp circuit.

DTC B2595 54

The headlamp/cornering lamp control module - right detects an invalid temperature in the right cornering lamp circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • One or more cornering lamp LEDs are inoperative.
  • The driver information center will display "Advanced Front Lighting System Fault."

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

DTC B2590 or B2595 will set when one or more of the cornering lamp LED's contained within the headlamp assembly are inoperative. The following components are serviceable within the headlamp assembly.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K26L Headlamp Control Module - Left
  • K26R Headlamp Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B2590 or B2595 is not set.

  • If DTC B2590 or B2595 is set
  1. Replace the appropriate K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module.
  2. Verify DTC B2590 or B2595 is not set.
  • If DTC B2590 or B2595 is set
  1. Replace the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.
  • Go to next step: If DTC B2590 or B2595 is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Headlamp LED Driver Module Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B259A or B259B

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B259A 01

Left Cornering Lamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B259B 01

Right Cornering Lamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Battery

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

The daytime running lamp relay - left and daytime running lamp relay - right is supplied with battery voltage at all times. If the engine is running and the ambient light is day the body control module (BCM) energizes the appropriate daytime running lamp relay by applying ground to the appropriate daytime running lamp relay control circuit. When the appropriate daytime running lamp relay is energized, the relay switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied through the appropriate daytime running lamp relay supply voltage circuit which illuminates the appropriate daytime running lamp.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • The engine is running.
  • Headlamp switch in AUTO position.
  • The ambient light is day.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to voltage on the control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The daytime running lamps are always OFF.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is not longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Engine is running idle, supply sufficient light to the ambient light sensor to simulate daylight conditions.

The daytime running lamps should be ON.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate daytime running lamp relay.

2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 86 and ground.

  • If the test lamp is OFF, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

3. Remove the test lamp.

4. Engine running, headlamp switch in the AUTOMATIC LIGHT position.

5. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate daytime running lamp relay B+ circuit terminal 86 and the control circuit terminal 85.

6. Cover the ambient light sensor to simulate night conditions. The test lamp should be OFF.

  • If the test lamp is ON, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

7. Supply sufficient light to the ambient light sensor to simulate daylight conditions. The test lamp should be ON.

If the test lamp is OFF, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

8. If all circuits test normal, replace the appropriate daytime running lamp relay.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC B259C or B259D

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B259C 03

Left High Beam Power Circuit Low Voltage

DTC B259C 07

Left High Beam Power Circuit High Voltage

DTC B259D 03

Right High Beam Power Circuit Low Voltage

DTC B259D 07

Left High Beam Power Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction
2. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The high beam and flash to pass functions are contained within the turn signal/multifunction switch. The body control module (BCM) provides the turn signal/multifunction switch with two signal circuits, the high beam signal circuit and the flash to pass signal circuit. When the low beam headlamps are ON and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, ground is applied to the BCM through the high beam signal circuit. The BCM responds to the high beam request by sending a message via serial data to the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module responds to the high beam request by sending a serial data message to the left and right headlamp/cornering lamp control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The left and right headlamp/cornering lamp control modules respond by illuminating their respective high beam LEDs.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • High beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B259C 03

The headlamp control module detects a low voltage condition in the headlamp/cornering lamp control module - left B+ circuit.

DTC B259C 07

The headlamp control module detects a high voltage condition in the headlamp/cornering lamp control module - left B+ circuit.

DTC B259D 03

The headlamp control module detects a low voltage condition in the headlamp/cornering lamp control module - right B+ circuit.

DTC B259D 07

The headlamp control module detects a high voltage condition in the headlamp/cornering lamp control module - right B+ circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • One or more of the high beam LEDs are inoperative.
  • The driver information center will display "Advanced Front Lighting System Fault" and "Headlamp Leveling Malfunction".

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

The following control modules located on each headlamp assembly are serviceable.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Control Module - Right
  • K26L Headlamp Control Module - Left
  • K26R Headlamp Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

NOTE: The test lamp in the following step will illuminate at LOW intensity.

This is normal circuit operation and does not indicate a circuit malfunction.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • Terminal 13 - left low beam
  • Terminal 22 - right low beam
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect a 3 A fused jumper between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • Terminal 13 - left low beam
  • Terminal 22 - right low beam

4. Remove the appropriate low beam fuse listed below at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.

  • Fuse F59UA - left low beam
  • Fuse F69UA - right low beam

5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low beam fuse B+ switch control terminal and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

6. Ignition OFF, connect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.

7. Install the low beam fuse at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

8. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

9. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

10. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 3 and ground, ignition ON.

11. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Headlamp High Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

12. Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM or Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B25FA or B25FB

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B25FA 03

Left Headlamp Leveling Control Module Supply Circuit Low Voltage

DTC B25FA 07

Left Headlamp Leveling Control Module Supply Circuit High Voltage

DTC B25FB 03

Right Headlamp Leveling Control Module Supply Circuit Low Voltage

DTC B25FB 07

Right Headlamp Leveling Control Module Supply Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The automatic headlamp leveling system automatically maintains the vertical alignment of the headlamps when the vehicle load and driving conditions change. The vehicle is equipped with suspension height sensors located on the left front and left rear suspensions. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module receives inputs from the front and rear suspension height sensors to determine vehicle pitch. The headlamp control module calculates the difference in vehicle pitch and sends a serial data message to both headlamp leveling control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The headlamp leveling control modules responds by driving their respective headlamp leveling actuators to the position commanded by the headlamp control module.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Ignition ON.
  • Headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B25FA 03

The headlamp control module detects a low voltage condition in the headlamp leveling control module - left B+ circuit.

DTC B25FA 07

The headlamp control module detects a high voltage condition in the headlamp leveling control module - left B+ circuit.

DTC B25FB 03

The headlamp control module detects a low voltage condition in the headlamp leveling control module - right B+ circuit.

DTC B25FB 07

The headlamp control module detects a high voltage condition in the headlamp leveling control module - right B+ circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • Advanced front lighting and headlamp leveling are disabled.
  • The driver information center will display "Advanced Front Lighting System Fault" and "Headlamp Leveling Malfunction".

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

No parts within the headlamp assemblies are serviceable so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. When replacing a headlamp assembly, the following control modules located on each headlamp assembly should be reused.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K28L Headlamp Leveling Control Module - Left
  • K28R Headlamp Leveling Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

5. Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B25FC or B25FD

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B25FC 00

Left Headlamp Leveling Control Module Malfunction

DTC B25FC 3A

Left Headlamp Leveling Control Module Incorrect Component Installed

DTC B25FD 00

Right Headlamp Leveling Control Module Malfunction

DTC B25FD 3A

Right Headlamp Leveling Control Module Incorrect Component Installed

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The automatic headlamp leveling system automatically maintains the vertical alignment of the headlamps when the vehicle load and driving conditions change. The vehicle is equipped with suspension height sensors located on the left front and left rear suspensions. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module receives inputs from the front and rear suspension height sensors to determine vehicle pitch. The headlamp control module calculates the difference in vehicle pitch and sends a serial data message to both headlamp leveling control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The headlamp leveling control modules responds by driving their respective headlamp leveling actuators to the position commanded by the headlamp control module.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Engine RUNNING.
  • Low beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B25FC 00

The headlamp control module detects an internal malfunction with the headlamp leveling control module - left.

DTC B25FC 3A

The headlamp control module detects an incorrect component for the left headlamp leveling system has been installed.

DTC B25FD 00

The headlamp control module detects an internal malfunction with the headlamp leveling control module - right.

DTC B25FD 3A

The headlamp control module detects an incorrect component for the right headlamp leveling system has been installed.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • Advanced front lighting and headlamp leveling are disabled.
  • The driver information center will display "Advanced Front Lighting System Fault" and "Headlamp Leveling Malfunction".

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

No parts within the headlamp assemblies are serviceable so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. When replacing a headlamp assembly, the following control modules located on each headlamp assembly should be reused.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K28L Headlamp Leveling Control Module - Left
  • K28R Headlamp Leveling Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

DTC B25FC 00 and B25FD 00

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B25FC 00 or B25FD 00 is not set.

  • If DTC B25FC 00 or B25FD 00 is set

Replace the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If DTC B25FC 00 or B25FD 00 is not set

3. All OK

DTC B25FC 3A and B25FD 3A

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is not set.

  • If DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is set
  1. Verify the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly part number is installed on the vehicle.
    • If an incorrect E13 Headlamp Assembly is installed

      Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

    • Go to next step: If the correct E13 Headlamp Assembly is installed
  2. Program the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  3. Verify DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is not set.
  • If DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is set
  1. Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.
  2. Verify DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is not set.
    • If DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is set

      Replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.

    • Go to next step: If DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is not set

      Go to next step: All OK.

  • Go to next step: If DTC B25FC 3A or B25FD 3A is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B25F4 or B25F5

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B25F4 00

Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Malfunction

DTC B25F4 3A

Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Incorrect Component Installed

DTC B25F4 42

Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Calibration Not Programmed

DTC B25F5 00

Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Malfunction

DTC B25F5 3A

Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Incorrect Component Installed

DTC B25F5 42

Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Calibration Not Programmed

Circuit/System Description

The high beam and flash to pass functions are contained within the turn signal/multifunction switch. The body control module (BCM) provides the turn signal/multifunction switch with two signal circuits, the high beam signal circuit and the flash to pass signal circuit. When the low beam headlamps are ON and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, ground is applied to the BCM through the high beam signal circuit. The BCM responds to the high beam request by sending a message via high speed bus to the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module then communicates via private CAN bus with the left and right high beam control modules to illuminate the high beam LEDs.

The part numbers for the left and right high beam control module are stored in the respective left and right high beam control modules. The headlamp control module compares the part numbers. If the part numbers do not match, DTC B25F4 3A or B25F5 3A will set.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • High beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B25F4 00 and B25F4 42

The headlamp control module detects that an internal malfunction has occurred in the left high beam control module.

DTC B25F4 3A

The headlamp control module detects that an incorrect component was installed.

DTC B25F5 00 and B25F4 42

The headlamp control module detects that an internal malfunction has occurred in the right high beam control module.

DTC B25F5 3A

The headlamp control module detects that an incorrect component was installed.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • One or more high beam LEDs are inoperative.
  • The driver information center will display Advanced Front Lighting System Fault and Head Light Leveling Failure.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

No parts are serviceable within the headlamp assemblies so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. The appropriate K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module, K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module, and K166 Multifunction LED Control Module may be reused when replacing the headlamp assembly.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

DTC B25F4 00 or B25F5 00

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B25F4 00 or B25F5 00 is not set.

  • If DTC B25F4 00 or B25F5 00 is set

Replace the appropriate K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module.

  • Go to next step: If DTC B25F4 00 or B25F5 00 is not set

3. All OK

DTC B25F4 42 or B25F5 42

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B25F4 42 or B25F5 42 is not set.

  • If DTC B25F4 42 or B25F5 42 is set
  1. Program the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Verify the DTC does not set.
    • If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module.
    • Go to next step: If the DTC does not set
  3. All OK.
  • Go to next step: If DTC B25F4 42 or B25F5 42 is not set

3. All OK

DTC B25F4 3A or B25F5 3A

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify DTC B25F4 3A or B25F5 3A is not set.

  • If DTC B25F4 3A or B25F5 3A is set
  1. Verify the appropriate K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module part number is installed on the vehicle.
    • If the incorrect K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module is installed, replace the K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module.
    • Go to next step: If the correct K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module is installed
  2. Program the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  3. Verify the DTC does not set.
  • If the DTC sets
  1. Replace the appropriate K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module.
  2. Verify the DTC does not set.
    • If the DTC sets, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
    • Go to next step: If the DTC does not set, all OK.
  • Go to next step: If the DTC does not set
  1. All OK.
  • Go to next step: If DTC B25F4 3A or B25F5 3A is not set

3. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Control Module Replacement
  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B25F6 or B25F7

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B25F6 00

Left Headlamp Cooling Fan Circuit Malfunction

DTC B25F7 00

Right Headlamp Cooling Fan Circuit Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The temperature of each headlamp assembly is measured by three temperature sensors. Each headlamp assembly includes a temperature sensor for the cornering lamp LEDs, low beam LEDs, and high beam LEDs. In the case that either headlamp assembly overheats, the low beam control module activates the appropriate cooling fan.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Low beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B25F6 00

The headlamp control module detects a malfunction on the left headlamp cooling fan circuit.

DTC B25F7 00

The headlamp control module detects a malfunction on the right headlamp cooling fan circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The driver information center will display Advanced Front Lighting System Fault.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

No parts are serviceable within the headlamp assemblies so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. The appropriate K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module, K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module, and K166 Multifunction LED Control Module may be reused when replacing the headlamp assembly.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, remove the appropriate K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module.

2. Install a jumper wire between the ground circuit terminal 29 at the K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module harness connector and the ground circuit terminal 1 at the appropriate harness connector listed below.

  • X110 - left headlamp assembly
  • X120 - right headlamp assembly

3. Install a 10 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 30 at the K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module harness connector and the B+ circuit terminal 3 at the appropriate harness connector listed below.

  • X110 - left headlamp assembly
  • X120 - right headlamp assembly

4. Verify the appropriate G46 Cooling Fan - Headlamp turns ON.

  • If the G46 Cooling Fan - Headlamp does not turn ON

Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If the G46 Cooling Fan - Headlamp turns ON

5. Replace the K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Headlamp Control Module Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B25F8 or B25F9

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B25F8 01

Left Headlamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B25F8 02

Left Headlamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B25F8 04

Left Headlamp Relay Control Circuit Open

DTC B25F9 01

Right Headlamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B25F9 02

Right Headlamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B25F9 04

Right Headlamp Relay Control Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Automatic Headlamps Without CE1

The body control module (BCM) monitors three signal circuits from the headlamp switch. When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position, all three signal circuits are open. When placed in the AUTO position, the BCM monitors inputs from the ambient light sensor to determine if the headlamps are required or if daytime running lamps will be activated based on outside lighting conditions. When the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit is grounded, indicating to the BCM that the exterior lamps should be turned OFF. With the headlamp switch in the PARK position, the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit is grounded, indicating that the park lamps have been requested. When the headlamp switch is placed in the HEADLAMP position, both the headlamp switch and park lamps ON signal circuit and the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit are grounded. The BCM responds to the low beam request by applying ground to the low beam relay control circuit which energizes the low beam relay. With the low beam relay energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the low beam fuses to the low beam control circuits illuminating the low beam headlamps.

Automatic Headlamps With CE1

The body control module (BCM) monitors three signal circuits from the headlamp switch. When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position, all three signal circuits are open. When placed in the AUTO position, the BCM monitors inputs from the rain sensing module to determine if the headlamps are required or if daytime running lamps will be activated based on outside lighting conditions. When the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit is grounded, indicating to the BCM that the exterior lamps should be turned OFF. With the headlamp switch in the PARK position, the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit is grounded, indicating that the park lamps have been requested. When the headlamp switch is placed in the HEADLAMP position, both the headlamp switch and park lamps ON signal circuit and the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit are grounded. The BCM responds to the low beam request by applying ground to the low beam relay control circuit which energizes the low beam relay. With the low beam relay energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the low beam fuses to the low beam control circuits illuminating the low beam headlamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • High beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B25F8 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the left headlamp low beam relay control circuit.

DTC B25F8 02 and B25F8 04

The BCM detects a short to ground or an open/high resistance in the left headlamp low beam relay control circuit.

DTC B25F9 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the right headlamp low beam relay control circuit.

DTC B25F9 02 and B25F9 04

The BCM detects a short to ground or an open/high resistance in the right headlamp low beam relay control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The low beam headlamps will not operate.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

DTC B25F8

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the KR49L Headlamp Low Beam Relay - Left.

2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and B+, ignition ON.

3. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the High Beams ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Ignition OFF.
  4. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

4. Test or replace the KR49L Headlamp Low Beam Relay - Left.

DTC B25F9

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the KR49R Headlamp Low Beam Relay - Right.

2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and B+, ignition ON.

3. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the High Beams ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Ignition OFF.
  4. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

4. Test or replace the KR49R Headlamp Low Beam Relay - Right.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center).
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B2600 or B2605

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2600 01

Left Daytime Running Lamps Control Circuit short to Battery

DTC B2600 02

Left Daytime Running Lamps Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B2600 04

Left Daytime Running Lamps Control Circuit Open

DTC B2605 01

Right Daytime Running Lamps Control Circuit short to Battery

DTC B2605 02

Right Daytime Running Lamps Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B2605 04

Right Daytime Running Lamps Control Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction
2. Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The ambient light sensor is used to monitor outside lighting conditions. The body control module (BCM) provides a 5-volt reference signal to the ambient light sensor. Depending on outside lighting conditions, the ambient light sensor provides a voltage signal to the BCM that will vary between 0.2 and 4.9 volts. The BCM monitors the ambient light sensor signal circuit to determine if outside lighting conditions are correct for either daytime running lights (DRL) or automatic headlamp system control when the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position. In daylight conditions, the BCM will command the DRLs. Any function or condition that turns on the headlamps will cancel DRL operation.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Headlamp switch in AUTO position.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2600 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the left DRL control circuit.

DTC B2600 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the left DRL control circuit.

DTC B2600 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the left DRL control circuit.

DTC B2605 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the right DRL control circuit.

DTC B2605 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the right DRL control circuit.

DTC B2605 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the right DRL control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • When DTC B2600 sets, the left DRL will be inoperative.
  • When DTC B2605 sets, the right DRL will be inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 headlamp.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 4 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 body control module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 body control module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 body control module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 body control module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E13 headlamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B260B or B260C

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B260B 02

Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B260B 04

Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit Open

DTC B260C 02

Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B260C 04

Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The ambient light sensor is used to monitor outside lighting conditions. The body control module (BCM) provides a low reference ground and 5 V reference signal to the ambient light sensor. Depending on outside lighting conditions, the ambient light sensor provides a voltage signal to the BCM that will vary between 0.2 and 4.9 V. The BCM monitors the ambient light sensor signal circuit to determine if outside lighting conditions are correct for either daytime running lamps or automatic headlamp system control when the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position. In daylight conditions, the BCM responds by applying battery voltage to the left and right daytime running lamp relay control circuits which energizes both daytime running lamp relays. With the daytime running lamp relays energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow to the daytime running lamp control circuits illuminating the left and right daytime running lamp.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Engine ON.
  • Headlamp switch in AUTO position.
  • Ambient light is day.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B260B 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the left daytime running lamp relay control circuit.

DTC B260B 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the left daytime running lamp relay control circuit.

DTC B260C 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the right daytime running lamp relay control circuit.

DTC B260C 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the right daytime running lamp relay control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The appropriate daytime running lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists and the ignition is cycled.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References

Circuit/System Testing

DTC B260B

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the KR42L Daytime Running Lamp Relay - Left.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 86 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate

Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate

Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

4. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 85 and B+, ignition ON.

5. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Left Daytime Running Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 21 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Ignition OFF.
  4. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 21 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

6. Test or replace the KR42L Daytime Running Lamp Relay - Left.

DTC B260C

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the KR42R Daytime Running Lamp Relay - Right.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 86 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate

Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate

Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

4. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 85 and B+, ignition ON.

5. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Right Daytime Running Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Ignition OFF.
  4. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

6. Test or replace the KR42R Daytime Running Lamp Relay - Right.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B2610

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2610 02

Passenger Compartment Dimming 1 Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Interior Backlighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The instrument panel dimmer switch is used to increase and decrease the brightness of the interior backlighting components. The instrument panel dimmer switch provides a voltage signal to the body control module (BCM) that will increase as the brightness of the lights are increased and decrease as the brightness of the lights are decreased. The BCM provides a low reference signal and a B+ reference circuit to the instrument panel dimmer switch. When the instrument panel dimmer switch is placed in the desired position, the dimmed voltage setting is applied from the instrument panel dimmer switch through the instrument panel dimmer switch signal circuit to the BCM. The BCM interprets the signal and applies a pulse width modulated voltage through the LED dimming control circuits illuminating the interior backlighting to the requested level of brightness.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Park lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the LED backlight dimming control circuit terminal 8 X2 or terminal 9 X7.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will disable the LED backlight dimming control circuits.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction - free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

NOTE: Each component with backlighting may need to be disconnected to isolate a short to voltage or short to ground. Use the schematics to identify the following:

  • Backlighting components the vehicle is equipped with
  • Each component's control and ground circuit terminals
  • Component locations on the backlighting control circuit

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the component with inoperative backlighting. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal and ground.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the LED Backlight Dimming ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
    • X2
    • X7
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
    • X2
    • X7
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the component with inoperative backlighting.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Ignition and Start Switch Replacement
  • Steering Wheel Airbag Coil Replacement
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Ignition and Start Switch Replacement
  • Parking Brake Actuator Switch Replacement
  • Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2615

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2615 02

Passenger Compartment Dimming 2 Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Dome Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The dome lamp switch has 3 positions: DOOR, OFF, and ON. The ON position provides a ground for continuous operation and the dome lamp will remain illuminated until the switch is placed in either the DOOR or OFF position. When in the DOOR position, the dome lamp operation is controlled by the body control module (BCM). When any door is opened, the door ajar switch contacts close and the BCM receives a door-open input. The BCM illuminates the dome lamp when any door is opened or a door lock/unlock request is activated with the key fob. After all doors have been closed, the dome lamp will remain illuminated approximately 3 seconds after the last door closes. When the driver places the dome lamp switch in the OFF position, the dome lamp will be disabled. In the event that the dome lamp were to remain illuminated for more than 10 minutes with the ignition switch in the OFF position and no doors opened, the BCM will deactivate the dome lamp control circuit to prevent total battery discharge.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2615 02

  • The BCM detects a short to ground in the dome lamps control circuit terminal 1 X7.
  • The BCM detects a short to ground or an open/high resistance in the F5 DA fuse B+ circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will disable the dome lamps control circuit terminal 1 X7 or terminal 5 X2.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction - free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

NOTE: Each lighting component may need to be disconnected to isolate a short to ground. Use the schematics to identify the following:

  • Lighting components the vehicle is equipped with
  • Each component's control and ground circuit terminals
  • Component locations on the lighting control circuit

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear
  • E1AA Floor Accent Lamp - Left Front
  • E1AB Floor Accent Lamp - Right Front

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 5
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 3
  • E1AA Floor Accent Lamp - Left Front terminal 2
  • E1AB Floor Accent Lamp - Right terminal 2
  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 8
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 2
  • E1AA Floor Accent Lamp - Left Front terminal 1
  • E1AB Floor Accent Lamp - Right terminal 1

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Courtesy Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate dome/floor accent lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Center Reading Lamp Replacement (without Sunroof)
  • Rear Seat Position Center Reading Lamp Replacement (with Sunroof)
  • Front Floor Flood Lamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2625

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2625 02

Display Dimming Pulse Width Modulation Output Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Interior Backlighting Malfunction
2. Door Lock Indicator Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The instrument panel dimmer switch is used to increase and decrease the brightness of the interior backlighting components. The instrument panel dimmer switch provides a voltage signal to the body control module (BCM) that will increase as the brightness of the lights are increased and decrease as the brightness of the lights are decreased. The BCM provides a low reference, signal, and B+ voltage reference to the instrument panel dimmer switch. When the instrument panel dimmer switch is placed in the desired position, the dimmed voltage setting is applied from the instrument panel dimmer switch through the instrument panel dimmer switch signal circuit to the BCM. The BCM interprets the signal and applies a pulse width modulated voltage through the LED dimming 1 and dimming 2 control circuits illuminating the interior backlighting to the requested level of brightness.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Park lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the LED backlight dimming control circuit terminal 5 X1.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The LED backlight dimming control circuit driver is shut down.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction - free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below, ignition ON.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly (-C3U)
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console (F45/UHX&UGN/UD5&UD7)

2. Place the interior backlighting dimmer switch in the HIGH position for high backlighting intensity.

3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 18 (-C3U)
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver terminal 5
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger terminal 5
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console terminal 3 (F45/UHX&UGN/UD5&UD7)
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

4. Place the interior backlighting dimmer switch in the LOW position for low backlighting intensity.

5. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate at FULL intensity between the appropriate control circuit listed below and ground.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 18 (-C3U)
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver terminal 5
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger terminal 5
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console terminal 3 (F45/UHX&UGN/UD5&UD7)
  • If the test lamp illuminates at full intensity
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate at full intensity

6. Test or replace the component with the inoperative indicator.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Door Lock Switch Replacement - Driver Side
  • Door Lock Switch Replacement - Passenger Front
  • Floor Console Accessory Function Switch Replacement
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B263A

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B263A 02

Exterior Illumination Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B263A 04

Exterior Illumination Lamp Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Exterior Courtesy Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies battery voltage to the exterior courtesy LED lighting located under each outside rearview mirror for approach lighting. When the keyless entry transmitter is operated to the lock/unlock functions the exterior door handles LED and the LED lighting located under each outside rearview mirror for approach lighting are commanded ON.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Park lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B263A 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the exterior courtesy lamps control circuit terminal 8 X7.

DTC B263A 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the exterior courtesy lamps control circuit terminal 8 X7.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will disable the exterior courtesy lamps control circuit.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction - free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 17 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Outside Rear View Mirror Courtesy Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E66 Outside Rearview Mirror Lamps Assembly.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B2645

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B2645 03

Ambient Light Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

DTC B2645 07

Ambient Light Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The ambient light sensor is used to monitor outside lighting conditions. The body control module (BCM) provides a 5 V reference signal to the ambient light sensor. Depending on outside lighting conditions, the ambient light sensor provides a voltage signal to the BCM that will vary between 0.2 and 4.9 V. The BCM monitors the ambient light sensor signal circuit to determine if outside lighting conditions are correct for either daytime running lamps or automatic headlamp system control when the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position. In daylight conditions, the BCM will command the daytime running lamps ON by applying voltage to the daytime running lamps control circuits illuminating the daytime running lamps. Any function or condition that turns on the headlamps will cancel daytime running lamps operation.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B2645 03

The BCM detects a short to ground in the ambient light sensor signal circuit.

DTC B2645 07

  • The BCM detects a short to voltage or an open/high resistance in the ambient light sensor signal circuit.
  • The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the ambient light sensor low reference circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • Automatic headlamp system and daytime running lamps are inoperative.
  • The BCM defaults to low light status and commands the low beam headlamps ON.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K33 HVAC Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K33 HVAC Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Ambient Light Sensor parameter is greater than 4.65 V.

  • If 4.65 V or less
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If greater than 4.65 V

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and the low reference circuit terminal 6.

6. Verify the scan tool Ambient Light Sensor parameter is less than 0.196 V.

  • If 0.196 V or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 0.196 V

7. Test or replace the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Sun Load Temperature and Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B2652

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2652 02

Passenger Compartment Dimming 3 Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Cigar Lighter Illumination at Full Intensity and Cannot be Dimmed or Turned OFF
2. Cigar Lighter Illumination do Not Illuminate

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies a voltage reference to the backlight dimmer switch, which is part of the headlamp switch. When the backlight dimmer switch is placed in a desired position, reference voltage is applied through the backlight dimmer switch rheostat to the BCM. The BCM interprets this voltage signal, then applies a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage through the instrument panel lamp control circuits illuminating the cigar lighter.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • The ignition is ON.
  • The headlamps or park lamps are ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground on the cigar lighter control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM does not attempt to illuminate the cigar lighter.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References

Circuit/System Verification

When opening the passenger door the Cigar Lighter illumination should go ON. When closing the driver door and locking the vehicle the Cigar Lighter illumination should go OFF after 5 s.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the E32 Cigarette Lighter Receptacle.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal C and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Exterior lights OFF.

4. Ignition OFF.

5. Close all doors and lock the vehicle, test for less than 0.3 V between harness E32 Cigarette Lighter Receptacle terminal B and ground after 5 s.

  • If greater than the specified value, test the circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuits test normal replace the K9 Body Control Module.

6. Unlock the vehicle.

7. Open the driver door.

8. Test for greater than 11 V between harness E32 Cigarette Lighter Receptacle terminal B and ground.

  • If less than the specified value, test the circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal replace the K9 Body Control Module.

9. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the E32 Cigarette Lighter Receptacle.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming and setup.

DTC B2740

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B2740 00

Front Fog Lamp Switch Circuit Malfunction

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Front Fog Switch Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The front fog lamp relay is supplied with battery voltage at all times. The front fog lamp switch signal circuit is grounded momentarily by pressing the front fog lamp switch. The body control module (BCM) energizes the front fog lamp relay by applying ground to the front fog lamp relay control circuit. When the front fog lamp relay is energized, the relay switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied through the front fog lamp fuse to the front fog lamp supply voltage circuit which illuminates the front fog lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • The ignition is turned ON.
  • Front fog lamp switch activated.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects the fog lamp switch is continuously active.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

Front fog lamps will be continuously illuminated.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The DTC will be current for as long as the fault is present.
  • When the fault is no longer present, the DTC will be a history DTC.
  • A history DTC will clear after 50 ignition cycles.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is not longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Fog Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Front Fog Lamps Switch parameter while turning the front fog lamps switch ON and OFF. The parameter should change between Active and Inactive.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 headlamp switch.

2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 10V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If less than the specified range, test the 12 V reference circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 BCM.

3. Test for 0.4K Ω to 1K Ω between the signal circuit terminal 12 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 BCM.
  • If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 BCM.

4. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the S30 headlamp switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC B3410 or B3420

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3410 02

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Front Axle Sensor Signal Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3410 05

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Front Axle Sensor Signal Circuit High Voltage/Open

DTC B3410 08

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Front Axle Sensor Signal Circuit Performance - Signal Invalid

DTC B3420 02

Automatic Headlamp Leveling Control Module Rear Axle Sensor Signal Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3410 05

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Rear Axle Sensor Signal Circuit High Voltage/Open

DTC B3420 08

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Rear Axle Sensor Signal Circuit Performance - Signal Invalid

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Each headlamp assembly contains a headlamp leveling motor that is controlled by the headlamp control module. The front and rear suspension position sensors provide the headlamp control module with suspension position information. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the headlamp control module. The sensors are connected to the control arms of the front and rear suspension. As the vehicle travels, the suspension compresses and rebounds moving the suspension position sensor arms. This causes the signal output of the sensor to change. The headlamp control module compares the information from both suspension position sensors and adjusts the headlamp leveling as needed.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Engine RUNNING.
  • Headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B3410 02 or B3420 02

The DTC will set when the headlamp control module detects no signal and low voltage on the sensor signal line.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The headlamp control module disables the headlamp leveling system.
  • The driver information center will display AFL Lamps Need Service.
  • On vehicles equipped with both AFL and headlamp leveling, the AFL system will remain active.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

NOTE: When replacing a headlamp leveling sensor it is necessary to perform the Suspension Position Sensor Calibration.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor, ignition ON.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and B+.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition ON.

4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If less than 4.8 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • If greater than 5.2 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

5. Verify the appropriate scan tool Leveling Position Sensor Signal parameter is less than 5 %.

  • If 5 % or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
  • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
  • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 %

6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and the signal circuit terminal 3.

7. Engine RUNNING, verify the appropriate scan tool Leveling Position Sensor Signal parameter is greater than 90 %.

  • If less than 90 %
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If 90 % or greater

8. Test or replace the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Suspension Position Sensor Calibration
  • Control Module References for headlamp control module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B3415

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3415 01

Automatic Headlamp Leveling Control Module Front Axle Sensor Supply Circuit Short to Battery

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Each headlamp assembly contains a headlamp leveling motor that is controlled by the headlamp control module. The front and rear suspension position sensors provide the headlamp control module with suspension position information. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the headlamp control module. The sensors are connected to the control arms of the front and rear suspension. As the vehicle travels, the suspension compresses and rebounds moving the suspension position sensor arms. This causes the signal output of the sensor to change. The headlamp control module compares the information from both suspension position sensors and adjusts the headlamp leveling as needed.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Engine RUNNING.
  • Headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B3415 01

The headlamp control module detects a short to voltage in the suspension position sensor 5 V reference circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The headlamp control module disables the headlamp leveling system.
  • The driver information center will display AFL Lamps Need Service.
  • On vehicles equipped with both AFL and headlamp leveling, the AFL system will remain active.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

NOTE: When replacing a headlamp leveling sensor it is necessary to perform the Suspension Position Sensor Calibration.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor, ignition ON.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and B+.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition ON.

4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If less than 4.8 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • If greater than 5.2 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

5. Verify the appropriate scan tool Leveling Position Sensor parameter is less than 5 %.

  • If 5 % or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 %

6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and the signal circuit terminal 3.

7. Engine RUNNING, verify the appropriate scan tool Leveling Position Sensor parameter is greater than 90 %.

  • If less than 90 %
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If 90 % or greater

8. Test or replace the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Suspension Position Sensor Calibration
  • Control Module References for headlamp control module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B3415 or B3425

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3415 01

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Front Axle Sensor Supply Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3425 01

Headlamp Leveling Control Module Rear Axle Sensor Supply Circuit Short to Battery

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Each headlamp assembly contains a headlamp leveling actuator that is controlled by the headlamp control module. The front and rear suspension position sensors provide the headlamp control module with suspension position information. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the headlamp control module. The sensors are connected to the control arms of the front and rear suspension. As the vehicle travels, the suspension compresses and rebounds moving the suspension position sensor arms. This causes the signal output of the sensor to change. The headlamp control module compares the information from both suspension position sensors and adjusts the headlamp leveling as needed. The headlamp control module communicates with the left and right headlamp leveling control modules and the left and right headlamp leveling control modules communicate with the left and right headlamp leveling actuators via the LIN serial data circuit.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Engine RUNNING.
  • Headlamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B3415 01

The DTC will set when the headlamp control module detects no signal and low voltage on the front sensor signal circuit.

DTC B3425 01

The DTC will set when the headlamp control module detects no signal and low voltage on the rear sensor signal circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The headlamp control module disables the headlamp leveling system.
  • The driver information center will display Service Headlight Leveling.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

No parts are serviceable within the headlamp assemblies so complete headlamp assembly replacement is necessary. The appropriate K135 Headlamp Low Beam Control Module, K191 Headlamp High Beam Control Module, and K166 Multifunction LED Control Module may be reused when replacing the headlamp assembly.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor, ignition ON.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and B+.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition ON.

4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If less than 4.8 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • If greater than 5.2 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

5. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and the signal circuit terminal 3.

  • If less than 4.8 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and the signal circuit terminal 3, engine RUNNING.

7. Verify the appropriate scan tool Suspension Manually Entered Trim Height parameter is greater than 0 mm.

  • If not greater than 0 mm
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If greater than 0 mm

8. Test or replace the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Suspension Position Sensor Calibration
  • Control Module References for headlamp control module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B3435 or B3440

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B3435 00

Automatic Headlamp Leveling Control Module Left Servo Driver 1 or 2 Circuit Malfunction

DTC B3440 00

Automatic Headlamp Leveling Control Module Right Servo Driver 1 or 2 Circuit Malfunction

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Left Headlamp Leveling Malfunction
2. Right Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Battery positive voltage is applied to the headlamp control module at all times. The headlamp control module has a normal operational voltage range of about 12.5 - 16 V and is only fully functional with the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the headlamp switch in the AUTO position. The communications enable signal from the body control module (BCM) wakes the headlamp control module microprocessor. The headlamp control module receives serial data messages from the engine control module (ECM), transmission control module (TCM), electronic brake control module (EBCM), and BCM with information regarding power mode, speed, steering angle, transmission gear selection, and headlamp switch status. The headlamp control module calculates the headlamp angle and sends commands to the left and right adaptive forward lighting system headlamp actuators. The headlamp actuators drive the headlamps to the position commanded by the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module monitors the headlamp actuator motor control circuits for proper circuit continuity and for shorts to ground or voltage. If a malfunction is detected, a DTC will be stored in memory and the driver will be notified with a message displayed over the driver information center located on the instrument cluster.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • The ignition is in the ON or RUN position.
  • The headlamps are ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B3435 00 or B3440 00

The DTC will set when the headlamp control module detects no signal and low voltage on the sensor signal line.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The headlamp control module disables the headlamp leveling system.
  • Service head light leveling indication ON.
  • Advanced front lighting system fault indication ON.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate headlamp assembly.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Ignition ON, headlamps ON, connect a test lamp between the ignition circuit terminal 6 and ground. The test lamp should illuminate.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the ignition circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance.

4. If all circuits test normal, replace the appropriate headlamp assembly. Verify that the DTC do not reset.

  • If the DTC resets, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for headlamp control module replacement, setup, and programming

DTC B3445 or B3878

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3445 01

Brake Lamps Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3445 02

Brake Lamps Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3445 04

Brake Lamps Circuit Open

DTC B3878 01

Right Brake Lamp Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3878 02

Right Brake Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3878 04

Right Brake Lamp Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

The brake pedal position sensor is used to sense the action of the driver application of the brake pedal.

The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal to the body control module (BCM).

The BCM will apply battery voltage to the right, left and center stop lamp control circuits.

Conditions for Running the DTC

B3445 01, B3878 01, B3445 02, B3878 02, B3445 04 or B3878 04

Brake pedal is applied or the headlamp switch is in park or low beam position.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B3445 01 or B3878 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage on the control circuit.

B3445 02 or B3878 02

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

B3445 04 or B3878 04

The BCM detects an open control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The appropriate brake lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the Brake Lamps test. The brake lamps should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the tail lamp listed below:

  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left harness connector terminal 4
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right harness connector terminal 4
  • If greater than the specified value, test the appropriate ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left harness connector terminal 3
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right harness connector terminal 3

4. Command the Brake Lamps test with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the appropriate control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the appropriate control circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the appropriate tail lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)

Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming.

DTC B3588

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B3588 00

Rear Fog Lamp Switch Circuit Malfunction

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Rear Fog Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The rear fog lamp switch signal circuit is grounded momentarily by pressing the rear fog lamp switch.

The body control module (BCM) responds to the rear fog lamp request by applying voltage to the rear fog lamps control circuit which illuminates the rear fog lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the headlamp switch rear fog lamp signal circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The rear fog lamp indicator on the instrument cluster is always ON.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Fog Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Rear Fog Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Rear Fog Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B3596

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B3596 00

Hazard Lamps Request Circuit Malfunction

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Hazard Lamps Malfunction
2. Hazard Warning Switch Backlighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The hazard flashers may be activated in any power mode. The hazard warning switch signal circuit is momentarily grounded when the hazard warning switch is pressed. The body control module (BCM) responds to the hazard warning switch signal input by supplying battery voltage to all four turn signal lamps in an ON and OFF duty cycle. When the hazard warning switch is activated, the BCM sends a serial data message to the instrument cluster requesting both turn signal indicators to be cycled ON and OFF.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Hazard lamps ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The hazard warning switch input is Active for longer than 60 s.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The hazard lamps are inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S26 Hazard Warning Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Hazard Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Hazard Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S26 Hazard Warning Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Hazard Warning Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC B3650

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B3650 08

High Beam Request Signal Circuit Performance - Signal Invalid

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

When the low beam is activated and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, the body control module (BCM) will receive a ground signal through the turn signal/multifunction switch signal circuit to illuminate the high beam lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Low beam is ON and high beam is activated.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The body control module (BCM) reports stuck turn signal/multifunction switch.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will not attempt to switch ON the high beam lamps.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, turn the headlamp switch in the low beam position. Push/pull the turn signal/multifunction switch between the ON/OFF position. The high beam lamps should be ON/OFF as the switch is cycled.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch harness connector. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If greater then the specified value, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

2. Connect the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch harness connector.

3. Disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.

4. Connect a test lamp between B+ and the signal circuit terminal 11 X3.

5. Push/pull the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch between the high beam and OFF position.

The test lamp should turn ON and OFF as the switch is cycled.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.
  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the signal circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit test normal, replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

6. If all circuits test normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Component Testing

Static Test

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch harness connector. S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch in flash position, test for less than 5 Ω between terminal 4 and terminal 3.

  • If greater than the specified value, replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

2. S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch in high beam position, test for less than 5 Ω between terminal 2 and terminal 3.

  • If greater than the specified value, replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Turn Signal Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming and setup

DTC B3806

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B3806 00

High Beam and Headlamp Flash Select Circuit Malfunction

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction
2. Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

When the turn signal/multifunction switch is momentarily placed in the flash to pass position, ground is applied to the body control module (BCM) through the flash to pass signal circuit. The BCM responds to the flash to pass request by applying ground to the high beam relay control circuit which energizes the high beam relay. With the high beam relay energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the high beam fuses to the high beam control circuits illuminating the high beam headlamps. The high beam headlamps will only illuminate for as long at the flash to pass switch is activated.

Conditions for Running the DTC

Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the turn signal/multifunction switch flash to pass signal circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The high beam headlamps and the high beam indicator on the instrument cluster are always ON.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Headlamps Flash Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Headlamps Flash Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Turn Signal Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B3881 or B3882

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3881 01

Tail Lamp Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3881 02

Tail Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3881 04

Tail Lamp Circuit Open

DTC B3882 01

Right Tail Lamp Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3882 02

Right Tail Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3882 04

Right Tail Lamp Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

The headlamp switch is supplied with ground at all times. When the headlamp switch is placed in either the park or low beam position, ground is applied to the tail lamp signal circuit to the body control module (BCM). The BCM responds by applying battery voltage to the left and to the right tail lamp control circuits. This energizes the tail lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

B3881 01 or B3882 01

  • The ignition is turned OFF.
  • The headlamp switch is in OFF or AUTO position.

B3881 02, B3882 02, B3881 04 or B3882 04

The headlamp switch is in park or low beam position.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B3881 01 or B3882 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage on the control circuit.

B3881 02 or B3882 02

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

B3881 04 or B3882 04

The BCM detects an open control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The appropriate tail lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the appropriate Rear Park Lamp test. The appropriate tail lamp should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the tail lamp listed below:

  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left harness connector terminal C
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right harness connector terminal D
    • If greater than the specified value, test the appropriate ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left harness connector terminal B
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left harness connector terminal F
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right harness connector terminal A
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right harness connector terminal E

4. Command the appropriate Rear Park Lamp test with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the appropriate control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the appropriate control circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the appropriate tail lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC B3883

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC B3883 02

License Plate Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

When the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the HEAD or PARK position, ground is applied to the park lamp switch ON signal circuit to the body control module (BCM). The BCM responds by applying voltage to the park lamps, tail lamps, and license lamps control circuits illuminating the park, tail, and license lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9-16 V.
  • Turn signal/multifunction switch in AUTO, PARK or ON positions.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground in the license plate lamps control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

License plate lamps inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

License Plate Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the appropriate E7 License Plate Lamp. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the License Plate Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E7 License Plate Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Rear License Plate Lamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B3884

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3884 01

Center High Mounted Brake Lamp Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3884 02

Center High Mounted Brake Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3884 04

Center High Mounted Brake Lamp Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Stop Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The brake pedal position sensor is used to sense the action of the driver application of the brake pedal.

The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal that will increase as the brake pedal is applied. The body control module (BCM) provides a low reference signal and a 5 V reference voltage to the brake pedal position sensor. When the variable signal reaches a voltage threshold indicating the brakes have been applied, the BCM will apply battery voltage to the right and left stop lamp control circuits, engine control module (ECM), and center high mounted stop lamp control circuit.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Brakes APPLIED.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B3884 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the center high mounted stop lamp control circuit.

DTC B3884 02

The BCM detects a short to ground in the center high mounted stop lamp control circuit.

DTC B3884 04

The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the center high mounted stop lamp control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The BCM will not illuminate the center high mounted stop lamp.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, trunk latch latched, disconnect the harness connector at the E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Center Brake Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Wagon) High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Hatchback)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B388B or B388C

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B388B 02

Secondary Left Tail and Brake Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B388B 04

Secondary Left Tail and Brake Lamp Circuit Open

DTC B388C 02

Secondary Right Tail and Brake Lamp Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B388C 04

Secondary Right Tail and Brake Lamp Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

When the headlamp switch is placed in either the park or low beam position, ground is applied to the tail lamp signal circuit to the body control module (BCM). The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal to the BCM. The BCM sends this messages to the trailer lighting control module.

The trailer lighting control module responds by applying battery voltage to the left and right tail lamp control circuits illuminating the tail lamps.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Brake/tail lamp ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B388B 02

The trailer lighting control module detects a short to ground in the secondary left tail and brake lamp control circuit.

DTC B388B 04

The trailer lighting control module detects an open in the secondary left tail and brake lamp control circuit.

DTC B388C 02

The trailer lighting control module detects a short to ground in the secondary right tail and brake lamp control circuit.

DTC B388C 04

The trailer lighting control module detects an open in the secondary right tail and brake lamp control circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The appropriate brake/tail lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists and the ignition is cycled.
  • A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • E51L Tail Lamp Assembly - Auxiliary Left
  • E51R Tail Lamp Assembly - Auxiliary Right

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal D and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal A and ground, ignition ON

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Auxiliary Tail and Brake Lamp test ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E51 Tail Lamp Assembly - Auxiliary.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for trailer lighting control module replacement, programming, and setup

DTC B3948 or B3949

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3948 01

Left Front Turn Signal Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3948 02

Left Front Turn Signal Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3948 04

Left Front Turn Signal Circuit Open

DTC B3949 01

Right Front Turn Signal Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3949 02

Right Front Turn Signal Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3949 04

Right Front Turn Signal Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

Ground is applied at all times to the turn signal/multifunction switch. When the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in either the turn right or turn left position, ground is applied to the body control module (BCM) through either the right turn or left turn signal switch signal circuit. The BCM then applies a voltage to the front/side and rear turn signal lamps through their respective voltage supply circuits.

Conditions for Running the DTC

B3948 01 and B3949 01

The appropriate turn signal is inactive

B3948 02, B3948 04, B3949 02 and B3949 04

The appropriate turn signal is active

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B3948 01 and B3949 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage on the control circuit.

B3948 02 and B3949 02

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

B3948 04 and B3949 04

The BCM detects an open control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The appropriate turn signal lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the Left Front Turn Signal Lamp test. The left front turn signal lamp, turn signal repeater light and outside wing mirror light should be ON/OFF.

Perform the Right Front Turn Signal Lamp test. The right front turn signal lamp, turn signal repeater light and outside wing mirror light should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate turn signal lamp.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the appropriate turn signal lamp ground circuit harness connector listed below and ground.

  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right ground circuit harness connector terminal 1
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left ground circuit harness connector terminal 1
  • A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver ground circuit harness connector terminal 5
  • A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger ground circuit harness connector terminal 5
  • If greater than the specified value, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate turn signal lamp control circuit harness connector listed below and ground.

  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right ground circuit harness connector terminal 5
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left ground circuit harness connector terminal 5
  • A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver ground circuit harness connector terminal 13
  • A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger ground circuit harness connector terminal 13

4. Command the appropriate turn signal lamp test ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the Signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the Signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

5. If all the circuits test normal, replace the appropriate turn signal lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Outside Rearview Mirror Replacement
  • Front Side Turn Signal Lamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC B3950 or B3951

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC B3950 01

Left Rear Turn Signal Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3950 02

Left Rear Turn Signal Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3950 04

Left Rear Turn Signal Circuit Open

DTC B3951 01

Right Rear Turn Signal Circuit Short to Battery

DTC B3951 02

Right Rear Turn Signal Circuit Short to Ground

DTC B3951 04

Right Rear Turn Signal Circuit Open

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

Ground is applied at all times to the turn signal/multifunction switch. When the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in either the turn right or turn left position, ground is applied to the body control module (BCM) through either the right turn or left turn signal switch signal circuit. The BCM then applies a voltage to the front/side and rear turn signal lamps through their respective voltage supply circuits.

Conditions for Running the DTC

B3950 01 and B3951 01

The appropriate turn signal is inactive

B3950 02, B3950 04, B3951 02 or B3951 04

The appropriate turn signal is active

Conditions for Setting the DTC

B3950 01 or B3951 01

The BCM detects a short to voltage on the control circuit.

B3950 02 or B3951 02

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

B3950 04 or B3951 04

The BCM detects an open control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The appropriate turn signal lamp is inoperative.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the appropriate Rear Turn Signal/Hazard Lamp test. The appropriate rear turn signal/hazard lamp should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate turn signal lamp.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the appropriate turn signal lamp ground circuit harness connector listed below and ground.

  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right ground circuit harness connector terminal 4
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left ground circuit harness connector terminal 4
  • If greater than the specified value, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate turn signal lamp control circuit harness connector listed below and ground.

  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right ground circuit harness connector terminal 2
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left ground circuit harness connector terminal 2

4. Command the appropriate turn signal lamp test ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

5. If all the circuits test normal, replace the appropriate turn signal lamp.

Repair Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

    Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)

  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC C0010

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC C0010 5A

Reverse Gear Signal Circuit Not Plausible

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

When the transmission is placed in the reverse position, the engine control module (ECM) sends a serial data message to the body control module (BCM). The message indicates that the gear selector is in the reverse position. The BCM applies battery voltage to the backup lamps. The backup lamps are permanently grounded. Once the driver moves the gear selector out of the reverse position, a message is sent by the ECM via serial data requesting the BCM to remove battery voltage from the backup lamp control circuit.

Conditions for Running the DTC

The vehicle is driving in forward or reverse direction.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The control module detects a stucking backup lamp switch.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the Backup Lamps Relay Command test. The backup lamp should be ON/OFF

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the C1 Battery.

3. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit harness connector terminal 2 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified value, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

4. Reconnect the negative terminal to the C1 Battery.

5. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.

6. ignition On, test for less than 0.3 V at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch signal circuit harness connector terminal 1 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage.

7. Ignition OFF, test for infinite resistance between the B16 Backup Lamp Switch signal circuit harness connector 1 and ground.

  • If lower than the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to ground.

8. Connect the harness connector at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

9. Disconnect the negative terminal of the C1 Battery.

10. Reversing gear engaged, test for less than 5 Ω between the K20 Engine Control Module X2 harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • Terminal 34 with LBY
  • Terminal 75 with LCD, LBX or LBS
  • Terminal 28 with LDE or 2H0
  • Terminal 18 with LDK or LBW
  • Terminal 82 with LLU
  • If greater than the specified value, test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

11. Reversing gear disengaged, test for infinite resistance between the K20 Engine Control Module X2 harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • Terminal 34 with LBY
  • Terminal 75 with LCD, LBX or LBS
  • Terminal 28 with LDE or 2H0
  • Terminal 18 with LDK or LBW
  • Terminal 82 with LLU
  • If lower than the specified value, test or replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

12. If all the circuits test normal, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.

Component Testing

Static Test

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch. Reversing gear engaged, test for less than 5 Ω at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch terminal 1 and terminal 2.

  • If greater than the specified value replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

2. Reversing gear disengaged, test for infinite resistance at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch terminal 1 and terminal 2.

  • If less than the specified value replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Wagon) High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Hatchback)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

DTC C0277 or C0890

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptors

DTC C0277 06

Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Low Voltage/Open

DTC C0277 07

Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage

DTC C0277 09

Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Too Fast Transitions

DTC C0277 4B

Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Calibration Not Learned

DTC C0890 03

Control Module Voltage Reference Output 3 Circuit Low Voltage

DTC C0890 07

Control Module Voltage Reference Output 3 Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Stop Lamps Malfunction
2. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The brake pedal position sensor is used to sense the action of the driver application of the brake pedal.

The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal that will increase as the brake pedal is applied. The body control module provides a low reference signal and a 5 V reference voltage to the brake pedal position sensor. When the variable signal reaches a voltage threshold indicating the brakes have been applied, the BCM will apply battery voltage to the left and right stop lamp control circuits as well as the center high mounted stop lamp control circuit illuminating the left and right stop lamps and the center high mounted stop lamp.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
  • Brakes APPLIED.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC C0277 06

  • The BCM detects a short to ground or an open/high resistance in the brake pedal position sensor 5 V reference circuit.
  • The BCM detects a short to ground or an open/high resistance in the brake pedal position sensor signal circuit.

DTC C0277 07

  • The BCM detects a short to voltage in the brake pedal position sensor 5 V reference circuit.
  • The BCM detects a short to voltage in the brake pedal position sensor signal circuit.
  • The BCM detects an open/high resistance in the brake pedal position sensor low reference circuit.

DTC C0277 09

The BCM detects the brake pedal position sensor signal is changing faster than possible under normal operating conditions.

DTC C0277 4B

The DTC will set when the brake pedal position sensor home position is not learned.

DTC C0890 03

The BCM detects a short to ground in the brake pedal position sensor 5 V reference circuit.

DTC C0890 07

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the brake pedal position sensor 5 V reference circuit.

The BCM detects a short to voltage in the brake pedal position sensor low reference circuit.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

  • The Traction Control indicator is commanded ON.
  • For DTC C0277 4B, the stop lamps may not activate at the expected brake pedal positions.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • For DTC C0277 07 the ignition must be cycled before the code can be cleared.
  • For DTC C0277 4B a successful brake pedal position sensor calibration has been performed.
  • A history DTC will clear once 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
  • A DTC will not clear the current status until the next ignition cycle.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

DTC C0277 or C0890

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor, ignition ON.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between low reference circuit terminal 1 and B+.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition ON.

4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between 5 V reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If less than 4.8 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
  • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  1. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If greater than 5.2 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

5. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Applied parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the appropriate 5 V reference and signal circuit terminal 3.

7. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Applied parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

8. Test or replace the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor.

DTC C0277 4B

1. Verify DTC C0277 4B is not set.

  • If DTC C0277 4B is set
  1. Ignition ON
  2. Perform the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure for the K9 Body Control Module. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration.
  3. Verify the DTC does not reset while operating the vehicle under the conditions for setting the DTC.
    • If the DTC resets, replace the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor.
    • Go to next step: If the DTC does not reset
  4. All OK.
  • Go to next step: If DTC C0277 4B is not set

2. All OK.

DTC C0277 09

1. Verify DTC C0277 09 is not set.

  • If DTC C0277 09 is set
  1. Replace the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor.
  2. Perform the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure for the K9 Body Control Module. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration.
  3. Verify the DTC does not reset while operating the vehicle under the conditions for running the DTC.
    • If the DTC resets, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
    • Go to next step: If the DTC does not reset
  4. All OK.
  • Go to next step: If DTC C0277 09 is not set

2. All OK.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

DTC C0297

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC C0297 02

Brake Applied Output Circuit

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

The brake pedal position sensor is used to sense the action of the driver application of the brake pedal.

The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal that will increase as the brake pedal is applied. The body control module provides a low reference signal and a 5 V reference voltage to the brake pedal position sensor. When the variable signal reaches a voltage threshold indicating the brakes have been applied, the BCM will apply a 12 volt signal to the brake applied output circuit to the engine control module.

Conditions for Running the DTC

The ignition is ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The BCM detects a short to ground on the control circuit.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

None.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The condition for setting the DTC is not longer present.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Verify that DTC C0277 is not set

  • If DTC is set, refer to DTC C0277 or C0890.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.

2. Connect a test lamp between the X2 harness connector terminal listed below and ground:

  • With LDE or 2H0 control circuit harness connector terminal 25
  • With LLU control circuit harness connector terminal 85

3. Ignition ON, push and release the brake pedal. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changed between pushed an released brake pedal.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

4. If all circuits test normal, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
  • Control Module References for BCM or ECM replacement, setup and programming

DTC P0504

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor

DTC P0504

Brake Switch Circuits 1 - 2 Not Plausible

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Circuit/System Description

The brake pedal position sensor is used to sense the action of the driver application of the brake pedal.

The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal that will increase as the brake pedal is applied. The body control module (BCM) provides a low reference signal and a 5 V reference voltage to the brake pedal position sensor. When the variable signal reaches a voltage threshold indicating the brakes have been applied, the BCM will apply battery voltage to the right and left stop lamp control circuits, engine control module (ECM), and center high mounted stop lamp control circuit.

Conditions for Running the DTC

  • Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V
  • Brakes APPLIED.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The ECM receives an invalid brake pedal status serial data message from the BCM.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

The cruise control system is disabled.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

  • The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
  • A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.

Diagnostic Aids

Verify that the brake pedal position sensor is properly calibrated.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Cruise Control Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.

2. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • Terminal 25 - with LLU/LTG
  • Terminal 57 - without LLU/LTG

3. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF while pressing and releasing the brake pedal.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

4. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
  • Control Module References for BCM or ECM replacement, programming, and setup

Symptoms - Lighting

NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using a symptom table.

1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using a symptom table in order to verify that all of the following conditions are true:

  • There are no DTCs set.
  • The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.

2. Review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to the following:

  • Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation
  • Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Visual/Physical Inspection

  • Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the lighting system. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories.
  • Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom.

Intermittent

Thoroughly inspect the wiring and connectors. An incomplete inspection of the wiring and connectors may result in misdiagnosis causing part replacement with the reappearance of the malfunction. If an intermittent malfunction exists, refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections.

Symptom List

Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:

  • Adaptive Forward Lighting Malfunction
  • Automatic Light Malfunction
  • Backup Lamps Malfunction
  • Courtesy Lamps Malfunction
  • Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction
  • Dome Lamps Malfunction
  • Front Fog Lamps Malfunction
  • Rear Fog Lamps Malfunction
  • Glove Box Illumination Malfunction
  • Hazard Lamps Malfunction
  • Headlamps Malfunction
  • Headlamp Leveling Malfunction (Manual)Headlamp Leveling Malfunction (Automatic)
  • High Intensity Discharge Lamp Malfunction
  • Interior Backlighting Malfunction
  • Lights On Indicator Malfunction
  • Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction
  • Stop Lamps Malfunction
  • Sunshade Illumination Malfunction
  • Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction

Adaptive Forward Lighting Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Adaptive Forward Lighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Battery positive voltage is applied to the headlamp control module at all times. The headlamp control module has a normal operational voltage range of about 12.5 - 16 V and is only fully functional with the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the headlamp switch in the AUTOMATIC LIGHT position.

The communications enable signal from the body control module (BCM) wakes the headlamp control module microprocessor. The headlamp control module receives serial data messages from the engine control module (ECM), transmission control module (TCM), electronic brake control module (EBCM), and BCM with information regarding power mode, speed, steering angle, transmission gear selection, and headlamp switch status. The headlamp control module calculates the headlamp angle and sends commands to the left and right adaptive forward lighting system headlamp actuators. The headlamp actuators drive the headlamps to the position commanded by the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module monitors the headlamp actuator motor control circuits for proper circuit continuity and for shorts to ground or voltage. If a malfunction is detected, a DTC will be stored in memory and the driver will be notified with a message displayed over the driver information center located on the instrument cluster.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

5. Test or replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.

6. Ignition ON.

7. Verify the appropriate headlamp operates to the LEFT and RIGHT positions when commanding the appropriate Headlamp Horizontal Motor LEFT and RIGHT with a scan tool.

  • If the headlamp does not operate LEFT and RIGHT

Test or replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If the headlamp operates LEFT and RIGHT

8. All OK.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for headlamp control module replacement, programming, and setup

Automatic Light Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Daytime Running Light Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The ambient light/sunload sensor is used to monitor outside lighting conditions. The ambient light/sunload sensor provides a voltage signal that will vary between 1.4 - 4.5 V depending on outside lighting conditions. The body control module (BCM) monitors the ambient light/sunload sensor signal circuit to determine if outside lighting conditions are correct for either daytime running lights or automatic lamp control when the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position. In daylight conditions the BCM will command the daytime running lights ON. During low light conditions the BCM will command the low beam headlamps ON.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Ambient Light Sensor parameter. The reading should be between 1.4 - 4.5 V and change with ambient light changes.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between ground circuit harness connector terminal 6 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Ignition ON, test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor signal circuit harness connector terminal 5 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

4. If all circuits test normal, replace the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor.

Component Testing

Static Test

1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Ambient Light Sensor parameter. The reading should be between 1.4 - 4.5 V and change with ambient light changes.

2. Test the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor by varying the ambient light while monitoring the sensors voltage output.

3. Verify that the voltage output is within the range of the specification.

  • If not within the specified range, replace the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Sun Load Temperature and Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

Backup Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Reverse gear lamp inoperative
2. Reverse gear lamp always ON

Circuit/System Description

When the transmission is placed in the reverse position, the engine control module (ECM) sends a serial data message to the body control module (BCM). The message indicates that the gear selector is in the reverse position. The BCM applies battery voltage to the backup lamps. The backup lamps are permanently grounded. Once the driver moves the gear selector out of the reverse position, a message is sent by the ECM via serial data requesting the BCM to remove battery voltage from the backup lamp control circuit.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, perform the Backup Lamps test. The backup lamp should be ON/OFF.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit harness connector terminal 2 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified value, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

3. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.

4. Ignition ON, test for less than 0.3 V at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch signal circuit harness connector terminal 1 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage.

5. Ignition OFF, test for infinite resistance between the B16 Backup Lamp Switch signal circuit harness connector terminal 1 and ground.

  • If lower than the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to ground.

6. Connect the harness connector at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

7. Reversing gear engaged, test for less than 5 Ω between the K20 Engine Control Module X1 harness connector terminal 71 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified value, test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

8. Reversing gear disengaged, test for infinite resistance between the K20 Engine Control Module X1 harness connector terminal 71 and ground.

  • If lower than the specified value, test or replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

9. If all the circuits test normal, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.

Component Testing

Static Test

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch. Reversing gear engaged, test for less than 5 Ω at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch terminal 1 and terminal 2.

  • If greater than the specified value replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

2. Reversing gear disengaged, test for infinite resistance at the B16 Backup Lamp Switch terminal 1 and terminal 2.

  • If less than the specified value replace the B16 Backup Lamp Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

Cornering Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

Lighting

1. Cornering Lamps Malfunction

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Circuit/System Description

The cornering lamps are activated automatically at vehicle speeds below 40 km/h (25 MPH) when the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in either the turn left or turn right positions and/or when the steering angle is changed from the straight-ahead position towards the side the vehicle is turning. When the headlamp control module detects that one of these operations has occurred, the headlamp control module sends a message via serial data to the left or right headlamp/cornering lamp control module. The appropriate headlamp/cornering lamp control module responds by applying battery voltage to the appropriate cornering lamp LED to illuminate the area that the vehicle is turning. The cornering lamps are deactivated automatically when the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the neutral position and/or the steering angle has returned in the straight-ahead position. The cornering lamps will not operate at vehicle speeds above 40 km/h (25 MPH).

Diagnostic Aids

When replacing a headlamp assembly, the following control modules located on each headlamp assembly are serviceable.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K26L Headlamp Control Module - Left
  • K26R Headlamp Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON, low beam headlamps ON.

2. Verify the appropriate cornering lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Cornering Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the cornering lamp does not turn ON and OFF

3. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.

4. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

5. Ignition ON.

6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

7. Test or replace the appropriate K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module.

8. Ignition ON.

9. Verify the cornering lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Cornering Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the cornering lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Replace the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If the cornering lamp turns ON and OFF

10. All OK

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Headlamp LED Driver Module Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

Courtesy Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Courtesy Lamps Malfunction
2. Dome Lamps Malfunction
3. Trailer Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies battery voltage to the front and rear reading lamps, left and right sunshade lamps, and front overhead console lamps via the courtesy lamp control circuit. When a sunshade mirror is opened, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow illuminating the respective lamps. The front and rear reading lamps are controlled by individual switches that are activated by the occupants when additional cabin lighting is required. In the event that any of these courtesy lamps were to remain illuminated for more than 10 minutes with the ignition switch in the OFF position, the BCM will deactivate the courtesy lamp control circuit to prevent total battery discharge.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Interior Lights Wiring Schematics
  • Power Distribution Wiring Schematics
  • Trailer Connector/Provision Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

NOTE: Each lighting component may need to be disconnected to isolate a short to ground. Use the schematics to identify the following:

  • Lighting components the vehicle is equipped with
  • Each component's control and ground circuit terminals
  • Component locations on the lighting control circuit

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the appropriate components listed below, ignition ON.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (without C3U)

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F41DA fuse at the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F41DA fuse at the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the appropriate component listed below.
  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (without C3U)
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connectors at the appropriate components listed below.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (without C3U)

4. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • A3L Sunshade - Left
  • A3R Sunshade - Right
  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • B163B Trailer Connector Detection Switch 2 (with VK0)
  • E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear

5. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • A3L Sunshade - Left terminal B
  • A3R Sunshade - Right terminal B
  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 5
  • B163B Trailer Connector Detection Switch 2 terminal A (with VK0)
  • E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp terminal 2
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail terminal 3
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail terminal 3
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 3
  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

6. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • A3L Sunshade - Left terminal A
  • A3R Sunshade - Right terminal A
  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 7
  • B163B Trailer Connector Detection Switch 2 terminal B (with VK0)
  • E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp terminal 1
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail terminal 1
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail terminal 1
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 4

7. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Inadvertent Load ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

8. Test or replace the courtesy lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Replacement
  • Sunshade Illuminated Mirror Lamp Bulb Replacement
  • Rear Seat Position Center Reading Lamp Replacement (with Sunroof)
  • Center Reading Lamp Replacement (without Sunroof)
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The ambient light sensor is used to monitor outside lighting conditions. The ambient light sensor provides a voltage signal that will vary between 0.2 and 4.9 V depending on outside lighting conditions.

The body control module (BCM) provides a 5 V reference signal to the ambient light sensor and the HVAC control module provides a low reference ground. The BCM monitors the ambient light sensor signal circuit to determine if outside lighting conditions are correct for either daytime running lamps or automatic lamp control when the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position. In daylight conditions the BCM will command the daytime running lamps ON. During low light conditions the BCM will command the low beam headlamps ON. Any function or condition that turns on the headlamps will cancel daytime running lamps operation. With the vehicle in park, the BCM commands the park lamps on which utilizes the same lamps as the daytime running lamps. Once the vehicle is in gear, the BCM then commands the daytime running lamps on with a separate circuit from the park lamps.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics
  • Body Control System Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the left daytime running lamp turns ON & OFF when commanding the Left Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left daytime running lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left daytime running lamp turns ON and OFF

3. Verify the right daytime running lamp turns ON & OFF when commanding the Right Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right daytime running lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the right daytime running lamp turns ON and OFF

4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Ambient Light Sensor Malfunction.

Circuit/System Testing

Daytime Running Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • Terminal 1 (with T4A)
  • Terminal 2 (with T4L)
  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 9 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
    • X5 - left daytime running lamp
    • X7 - right daytime running lamp
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 9 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
    • X5 - left daytime running lamp
    • X7 - right daytime running lamp
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 9 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
    • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
  3. Test or replace the daytime running lamp.

Ambient Light Sensor Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K33 HVAC Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K33 HVAC Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Ambient Light Sensor parameter is greater than 4.65 V.

  • If 4.65 V or less
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If greater than 4.65 V

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and the low reference circuit terminal 6.

6. Verify the scan tool Ambient Light Sensor parameter is less than 0.196 V.

  • If 0.196 V or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 0.196 V

7. Test or replace the B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Sun Load Temperature and Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement
  • Headlamp LED Driver Module Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM or HVAC Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

Dome Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Dome Lamps Malfunction
2. Dome Lamp Switch Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The dome lamp switch has 3 positions: DOOR, OFF, and ON. The ON position provides a ground for continuous operation and the dome lamp will remain illuminated until the switch is placed in either the DOOR or OFF position. When in the DOOR position, the dome lamp operation is controlled by the body control module (BCM). When any door is opened, the door ajar switch contacts close and the BCM receives a door-open input. The BCM illuminates the dome lamp when any door is opened or a door lock/unlock request is activated with the key fob. After all doors have been closed, the dome lamp will remain illuminated approximately 3 seconds after the last door closes. When the driver places the dome lamp switch in the OFF position, the dome lamp will be disabled. In the event that the dome lamp were to remain illuminated for more than 10 minutes with the ignition switch in the OFF position and no doors opened, the BCM will deactivate the dome lamp control circuit to prevent total battery discharge.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Interior Lights Wiring Schematics
  • Power Distribution Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Door Ajar Sw. parameter changes between Active and Inactive while opening and closing each vehicle door.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the scan tool Interior/Courtesy Lighting Master Switch parameter changes between Door, On, and Cancel while placing the dome lamp switch in the Door, On, and Cancel positions.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Dome Lamp Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

4. Verify the dome lamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the Courtesy Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the dome lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Dome Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the dome lamps turn ON and OFF

5. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Dome Lamp Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Interior/Courtesy Lighting Master Switch parameter is Door.

  • If Cancel
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 21 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If On
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Door

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 21 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Interior/Courtesy Lighting Master Switch parameter is Cancel.

  • If not Cancel
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 21 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Cancel

7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

8. Verify the scan tool Interior/Courtesy Lighting Master Switch parameter is On.

  • If not On
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If On

9. Test or replace the A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly.

Dome Lamps Malfunction

NOTE: Each lighting component may need to be disconnected to isolate a short to ground. Use the schematics to identify the following:

  • Lighting components the vehicle is equipped with
  • Each component's control and ground circuit terminals
  • Component locations on the lighting control circuit

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the appropriate components listed below, ignition ON.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • B177 Rain/Ambient Light Sensor Module (with CE1)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (with C93)

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F41DA fuse at the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F41DA fuse at the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the appropriate component listed below.
  3. A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  4. B177 Rain/Ambient Light Sensor Module (with CE1)
  5. E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (with C93)
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connectors at the appropriate components listed below.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • B177 Rain/Ambient Light Sensor Module (with CE1)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (with C93)

4. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail (with C3U)
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail (with C3U)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear (without C3U)
  • E1AA Floor Accent Lamp - Left Front (with C93)
  • E1AB Floor Accent Lamp - Right Front (with C93)

5. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 5
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail terminal 3 (with C3U)
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail terminal 3 (with C3U)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 3 (without C3U)
  • E1AA Floor Accent Lamp - Left Front terminal 2 (with C93)
  • E1AB Floor Accent Lamp - Right Front terminal 2 (with C93)
  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

6. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 8
  • E37H Dome/Reading Lamps - Left Roof Rail terminal 4 (with C3U)
  • E37J Dome/Reading Lamps - Right Roof Rail terminal 4 (with C3U)
  • E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear terminal 2 (without C3U)
  • E1AA Floor Accent Lamp - Left Front terminal 1 (with C93)
  • E1AB Floor Accent Lamp - Right Front terminal 1 (with C93)

7. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Courtesy Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

8. Test or replace the appropriate courtesy/dome Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Center Reading Lamp Replacement (without Sunroof)
  • Front Floor Flood Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Seat Position Center Reading Lamp Replacement (with Sunroof)
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Front Fog Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Front Fog Lamps Malfunction
2. Front Fog Lamp Switch Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The front fog lamp relay is supplied with battery voltage at all times. The front fog lamp switch signal circuit is grounded momentarily by pressing the front fog lamp switch. The body control module (BCM) energizes the front fog lamp relay by applying ground to the front fog lamp relay control circuit. When the front fog lamp relay is energized, the relay switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied through the front fog lamp fuse to the front fog lamp control circuit which illuminates the front fog lamps. With the front fog lamp switch activated the BCM sends a message via serial data to the instrument cluster requesting the instrument cluster to illuminate the front fog indicator.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Fog Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON, headlamps ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Front Fog Lamps Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the front fog lamps ON and OFF with the front fog lamp switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Front Fog Lamp Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the front fog lamps turn ON and OFF when commanding the Front Fog Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the front fog lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Front Fog Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the front fog lamps turn ON and OFF

4. Verify the front fog lamp indicator on the instrument cluster turns ON and OFF while commanding the front fog lamps ON and OFF with the front fog lamp switch.

  • If the front fog lamp indicator does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Front Fog Lamp Indicator Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the front fog lamp indicator turns ON and OFF

5. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Front Fog Lamp Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Front Fog Lamps Relay Command parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Front Fog Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Front Fog Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, remove the appropriate E29 Fog Lamp - Front. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF when commanding the Front Fog Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

Test or replace the E29 Fog Lamp - Front.

  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF

5. Ignition OFF, install the E29 Fog Lamp - Front. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.

6. Verify the front fog lamps do not illuminate.

  • If the front fog lamps illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, remove both E29 Fog Lamp - Front, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal C1 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
  • Go to next step: If the front fog lamps do not illuminate

7. Ignition OFF, connect a 3 A fused jumper between the control circuit terminal C1 and B+, ignition ON.

8. Verify the front fog lamps illuminate.

  • If the front fog lamps do not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the 3 A fused jumper wire, remove both E29 Fog Lamp - Front.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal C1 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, all OK.
  • Go to next step: If the front fog lamps illuminate

9. Ignition OFF, connect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

10. Disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

NOTE: The test lamp in the following step will illuminate at LOW intensity.

This is normal circuit operation and does not indicate a circuit malfunction.

11. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

12. Ignition OFF, connect a 3 A fused jumper between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground, ignition ON.

13. Verify both E29 Fog Lamp - Front illuminate.

  • If the front fog lamps do not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 20 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the front fog lamps illuminate

14. Test or replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Front Fog Lamp Indicator Malfunction

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the front fog lamp indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the Instrument Cluster All Indicators Test ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the front fog lamp indicator is always OFF or remains ON

Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.

  • Go to next step: If the front fog lamp indicator turns ON and OFF

3. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Front Fog Lamp Replacement
  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM or instrument cluster replacement, programming, and setup

Rear Fog Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.

Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Rear Fog Lamps Malfunction
2. Rear Fog Lamp Switch Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The rear fog lamp switch signal circuit is grounded momentarily by pressing the rear fog lamp switch.

The body control module (BCM) responds to the rear fog lamp request by applying voltage to the rear fog lamps control circuit which illuminates the rear fog lamps.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Fog Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON, park lamps ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Rear Fog Lamps Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the rear fog lamp ON and OFF with the rear fog lamp switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Fog Lamp Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the rear fog lamps turn ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Fog Lamp(s) Relay ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the rear fog lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Fog Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the rear fog lamps turn ON and OFF

4. Verify the rear fog lamp indicator on the headlamp switch turns ON and OFF while commanding the rear fog lamp ON and OFF with the rear fog lamp switch.

  • If the rear fog lamp indicator does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Fog Lamp Indicator Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the rear fog lamp indicator turns ON and OFF

5. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Rear Fog Lamp Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Rear Fog Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Rear Fog Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    1. If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    2. If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Rear Fog Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E58 Rear Compartment Lid Tail Lamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 3 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Fog Lamp(s) Relay ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E58 Rear Compartment Lid Tail Lamp Assembly.

Rear Fog Lamp Indicator Malfunction

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the rear fog lamp indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the Instrument Cluster All Indicators Test ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the rear fog lamp indicator is always OFF or remains ON

Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.

  • Go to next step: If the rear fog lamp indicator turns ON and OFF

3. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM or Instrument Cluster replacement, programming, and setup

Glove Box Illumination Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Reading Lamps Always OFF
2. Sunshade Lamps Always OFF
3. Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Always OFF
4. All Lamps always on

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies the dome/reading lamps, sunshade and instrument panel compartment lamp with battery voltage. When switching on the following components the concerning lamps will illuminate:

  • Dome/reading lamps
  • Dome/reading lamps - row
  • Sunshade - left front
  • Sunshade - right front
  • Instrument panel compartment lamp

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, observe lamp of the instrument panel compartment while opening the glove box. The lamp should illuminate when opened.

Circuit/System Testing

Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Circuit Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the C1 Battery.

3. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

4. Reconnect the negative terminal to the C1 Battery 5. Ignition ON, test for greater than 11 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If less than the specified range, test the circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

6. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the E27 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

HAZARD LAMPS MALFUNCTION

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Hazard Lamps Malfunction
2. Hazard Warning Switch Backlighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The hazard flashers may be activated in any power mode. The hazard warning switch signal circuit is momentarily grounded when the hazard warning switch is pressed. The body control module (BCM) responds to the hazard warning switch signal input by supplying battery voltage to all four turn signal lamps in an ON and OFF duty cycle. When the hazard warning switch is activated, the BCM sends a serial data message to the instrument cluster requesting both turn signal indicators to be cycled ON and OFF.

The instrument panel dimmer switch controls are located on the headlamp switch assembly and are used to increase and decrease the brightness of the interior backlighting components. When the instrument panel dimmer switch is placed in a desired brightness position, the body control module (BCM) receives a signal from the instrument panel dimmer switch and responds by applying a pulse width modulated voltage to the hazard warning switch LED backlighting control circuit illuminating the LED to the desired level of brightness.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics
  • Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Hazard Lamps Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the hazard lamps ON and OFF with the hazard warning switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Hazard Warning Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify all left and right turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the hazard lamps ON and OFF with the hazard warning switch.

  • If all turn signal lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators MalfunctionTurn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction

  • Go to next step: If all turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF

4. Verify the hazard warning switch backlighting turns ON and OFF while commanding the Hazard Lamps Switch Backlight ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the hazard warning switch backlighting does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Hazard Warning Switch Backlighting Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the hazard warning switch backlighting turns ON and OFF

5. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Hazard Warning Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S26 Hazard Warning Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Hazard Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Hazard Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S26 Hazard Warning Switch.

Hazard Warning Switch Backlighting Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S26 Hazard Warning Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Hazard Lamps Switch Backlight ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the S26 Hazard Warning Switch.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Hazard Warning Switch Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

High Intensity Discharge Lamp Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Low Beam Headlamps Inoperative
2. Low Beam Headlamps Always ON

Circuit/System Description

The vehicle headlamps are controlled by the body control module (BCM) based on inputs from the headlamp switch and the turn signal/multifunction switch. The headlamp switch has four positions: OFF, AUTOMATIC LIGHT, PARKING LIGHT, and LOW BEAM. The default headlamp switch position is AUTOMATIC LIGHT, in which the BCM uses the ambient light sensor to determine when headlamps are needed. The OFF portion of the headlamp switch is a momentary switch which overrides the automatic headlamp and will turn OFF the vehicle headlamps. When in the OFF position, the headlamp switch grounds the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit, prompting the BCM to turn OFF the headlamps. The Park position of the headlamp switch will only illuminate the vehicle parking lamps.

The LOW BEAM position of the headlamp switch will illuminate both the parking lamps, as well has the headlamps. With the headlamp switch in the LOW BEAM position, the headlamp switch headlamps on signal circuit is grounded, prompting the BCM to turn on the headlamps, regardless of other factors such as ambient light.

When a low beam request is received, the BCM grounds the headlamp low beam relay control circuit.

This energizes the coil in the headlamp low beam relay, causing the relay switch to close. This then applies B+ to both low beam high intensity discharge (HID) headlamps through the left low beam and right low beam fuses, illuminating the low beam headlamps. When a high beam request is received, the BCM grounds the headlamp high beam relay control circuit. This energizes the coil in the high beam relay, causing the relay switch to close. This then applies B+ to both low beam HID headlamps through the left high beam and right high beam fuses, illuminating the high beam headlamps.

Diagnostic Aids

The following symptoms are noticeable signs of bulb failure:

  • Flickering light, caused in the early stages of bulb failure.
  • Lights go out, caused when the ballast detects excessive, repetitive bulb re-strike.
  • Color change - The lamp may change to a dim pink glow.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

WARNING: The high intensity discharge system produces high voltage and current.

To reduce the risk of severe shocks and burns:

  • Never open the high intensity discharge system ballast or the arc tube assembly starter.
  • Never probe between the high intensity discharge system ballast output connector and the arc tube assembly.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the headlamp low beam relay.

2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit terminal 87 and ground.

  • If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to voltage.

3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 86 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance.

4. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for an open/high resistance.

5. Disconnect the harness connector at the inoperative E4 headlamp.

6. Test for less than 5 Ω between the headlamp ground circuit terminal 10 and ground

  • If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

7. Connect the harness connector at the E4 headlamp.

8. Connect a 15 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and the control circuit terminal 87. Verify the headlamp is activated.

If the headlamp does not activate and the jumper wire fuse is good, test the control circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the headlamp.

  • If the headlamp does not activate and the jumper wire fuse is open, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the headlamp.

9. Connect a test lamp between the B+ circuit terminal 86 and the control circuit terminal 85.

10. Command the Low Beams ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states.

  • If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 BCM.
  • If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 BCM.

11. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the headlamp low beam relay.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming

Headlamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Headlamps Malfunction - Low Beam
2. Headlamps Malfunction - High Beam
3. Headlamp Switch Malfunction
4. Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction
5. Automatic High Beam Select Switch Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Low Beam Headlamps (with T4A)

For headlamp operation, the body control module (BCM) monitors three signal circuits from the headlamp switch. When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position, the three signal circuits are unaffected (open) and the BCM relies on the ambient light sensor input to turn the headlamps and daytime running lamps ON and OFF. When the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit is grounded, indicating to the BCM that the exterior lamps should be turned OFF. With the headlamp switch in the PARK LAMPS position, the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit is grounded, indicating that the park lamps have been requested.

When the headlamp switch is in the HEADLAMP position, both the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit and the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit are grounded. The BCM responds by commanding the park lamps and low beam headlamps ON. With the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMP or AUTO position, the BCM responds by applying battery positive voltage to the left and right low beam headlamp control circuits illuminating the low beam headlamps.

Low Beam Headlamps (with T4L)

For headlamp operation, the body control module (BCM) monitors three signal circuits from the headlamp switch. When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position, the three signal circuits are unaffected (open) and the BCM relies on the ambient light sensor input to turn the headlamps and daytime running lamps ON and OFF. When the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, the headlamp switch headlamps OFF signal circuit is grounded, indicating to the BCM that the exterior lamps should be turned OFF. With the headlamp switch in the PARK LAMPS position, the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit is grounded, indicating that the park lamps have been requested.

When the headlamp switch is in the HEADLAMP position, both the headlamp switch park lamps ON signal circuit and the headlamp switch headlamps ON signal circuit are grounded. The BCM responds to the low beam request by applying ground to the left and right low beam relay control circuits which energizes the left and right low beam relays. With the low beam relays energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the left and right low beam fuses. Battery voltage is then applied from the low beam fuses, through the low beam control circuits to the left and right headlamp/cornering lamp control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The left and right headlamp/cornering lamp control modules respond by illuminating the low beam LED headlamps.

High Beam Headlamps (with T4A)

The high beam and flash to pass functions are contained within the turn signal/multifunction switch. The BCM provides the turn signal/multifunction switch with two signal circuits, the high beam signal circuit and the flash to pass signal circuit. When the low beam headlamps are ON and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, ground is applied to the BCM through the high beam signal circuit. The BCM responds to the high beam request by applying ground to the high beam relay control circuit which energizes the high beam relay. With the high beam relay energized, the switch contacts close allowing battery voltage to flow through the left and right high beam fuses to the high beam control circuits illuminating the left and right high beam headlamps.

High Beam Headlamps (with T4L)

The high beam and flash to pass functions are contained within the turn signal/multifunction switch. The body control module (BCM) provides the turn signal/multifunction switch with two signal circuits, the high beam signal circuit and flash to pass signal circuit. When the low beam headlamps are ON and the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in the high beam position, ground is applied to the BCM through the high beam signal circuit. The BCM responds to the high beam request by sending a message via serial data to the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module responds to the high beam request by communicating via serial data with the left and right headlamp/cornering lamp control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The left and right headlamp/cornering lamp control modules respond by illuminating there respective high beam LEDs.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics
  • Body Control System Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Headlamps On Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the headlamp ON and OFF with the headlamp switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the scan tool Automatic Headlamps Disable Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the automatic lamp control ON and OFF with the headlamp switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

4. Verify the scan tool Headlamps Flash Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the flash to pass ON and OFF with the turn signal/multifunction switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

5. Verify the scan tool High Beam Select Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the high beams ON and OFF with the turn signal/multifunction switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

6. Verify the left low beam turns ON and OFF when commanding the Left Headlamp Low Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left low beam does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamps Malfunction - Low Beam.

  • Go to next step: If the left low beam turns ON and OFF

7. Verify the right low beam turns ON and OFF when commanding the Right Headlamp Low Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right low beam does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamps Malfunction - Low Beam.

  • Go to next step: If the right low beam turns ON and OFF

8. Low beam headlamps ON, verify the high beams turn ON and OFF when commanding the High Beams ON and OFF with the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

  • If the high beams do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamps Malfunction - High Beam.

  • Go to next step: If the high beams turn ON and OFF

9. Verify the high beam indicator on the instrument cluster turns ON and OFF while commanding the All Indicators ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the high beam indicator does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - High Beam Indicator Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the high beam indicator turns ON and OFF

10. (TQ5/UVG only), verify the automatic high beam control indicator on the instrument cluster turns ON and OFF while commanding the automatic high beam control ON and OFF with the automatic high beam control switch located on the Turn Signal/Multifunction switch.

  • If the automatic high beam control indicator does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Automatic High Beam Select Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the automatic high beam control indicator turns ON and OFF

11. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Headlamp Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Automatic Headlamps Disable Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Automatic Headlamps Disable Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

8. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.

9. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

10. Verify the scan tool Headlamps On Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

11. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.

12. Verify the scan tool Headlamps On Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

13. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool High Beam Select Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 7 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 7 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool High Beam Select Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 7 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Verify the scan tool Headlamps Flash Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

8. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.

9. Verify the scan tool Headlamps Flash Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

10. Test or replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

Automatic High Beam Select Switch Malfunction (with TQ5/UVG)

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the automatic high beam control indicator on the instrument cluster is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 4 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 4 and ground.

6. Verify the automatic high beam control indicator on the instrument cluster is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 4 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

Headlamps Malfunction - Low Beam (with T4A)

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, remove the appropriate E4 Headlamp - Low Beam bulb. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Headlamp Low Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E4 Headlamp - Low Beam.

Headlamps Malfunction - Low Beam (with T4L)

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

NOTE: The test lamp in the following step will illuminate at LOW intensity.

This is normal circuit operation and does not indicate a circuit malfunction.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • Terminal 13 - left low beam
  • Terminal 22 - right low beam
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect a 3 A fused jumper between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • Terminal 13 - left low beam
  • Terminal 22 - right low beam

4. Remove the appropriate low beam fuse listed below at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.

  • Fuse F59UA - left low beam
  • Fuse F69UA - right low beam

5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low beam fuse B+ switch control terminal and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

6. Ignition OFF, connect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.

7. Install the low beam fuse at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

8. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

9. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

10. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 3 and ground, ignition ON.

11. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Headlamp Low Beam ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2.  Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3.  Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

12. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

13. Disconnect the appropriate K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

14. Test for less than 10 Ω between each ground circuit terminal listed below at the E13 Headlamp Assembly and ground.

  • Terminal 2 X1
  • Terminal 6 X1
  • Terminal 33 X2
  • If 10 Ω or greater

Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

15. Ignition ON, low beam headlamps ON.

16. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 at the E13 Headlamp Assembly and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate

Replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

17. Replace the K189 Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module.

Headlamps Malfunction - High Beam (with T4A)

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

NOTE: The test lamp in the following step will illuminate at LOW intensity.

This is normal circuit operation and does not indicate a circuit malfunction.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 18 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect a 3A fused jumper between the control circuit terminal 18 and ground.

4. Remove the left high beam fuse (F70UA) at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.

5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the high beam fuse (F70UA) B+ switch control terminal and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

6. Ignition OFF, connect the X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.

7. Install the left high beam fuse (F70UA) at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.

8. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, remove the appropriate E4 Headlamp - High Beam. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

9. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

10. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON, low beam headlamps ON.

11. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the High Beams ON and OFF with the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

12. Test or replace the E4 Headlamp - High Beam.

High Beam Indicator Malfunction

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the high beam indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the Instrument Cluster All Indicators ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the high beam indicator is always OFF or remains ON

Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.

  • Go to next step: If the high beam indicator turns ON and OFF

3. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Turn Signal Switch Replacement
  • Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Left Side (High Beam) Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Left Side (Low Beam)
  • Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Right Side (High Beam) Headlamp Bulb Replacement - Right Side (Low Beam)
  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM, Headlamp Control module, Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control module, or Instrument Cluster replacement, programming, and setup

Headlamp Leveling Malfunction (Manual)

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Each headlamp assembly contains a headlamp leveling actuator that is controlled by the headlamp leveling switch. The headlamp leveling switch is supplied with ignition voltage and ground and contains a resistor ladder with 4 positions for adjusting the headlamps up or down. When the headlamp leveling switch is activated to the desired position, voltage from the B+ ignition circuit is pulled down through the resistor ladder and the voltage is applied to the left and right headlamp leveling actuators via the headlamp leveling control circuits. The headlamp leveling actuators are supplied with B+ and ground.

When the headlamp leveling switch is activated, the left and right headlamp leveling actuators respond by moving the headlamps to the desired position.

Diagnostic Aids

For testing purposes, the vehicle battery must be fully charged.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 7 and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ ignition circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F44UA fuse at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ ignition circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

5. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

6. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

7. Ignition ON.

8. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ ignition circuit terminal 4 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F27UA fuse at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

9. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch.

10. Ignition ON, exterior lights OFF.

11. Test the voltage between the control circuit terminal 8 at the E13 Headlamp Assembly harness connector and ground for each headlamp leveling switch position listed below.

  • Headlamp leveling switch position 0 - 10 V - 11 V
  • Headlamp leveling switch position 1 - 8.5 V - 9.9 V
  • Headlamp leveling switch position 2 - 8 V - 9 V
  • Headlamp leveling switch position 3 - 6 V - 7 V
  • If less than the specified voltage range for each headlamp leveling switch position
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 9 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.
  • If greater than the specified voltage range for each headlamp leveling switch position
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 9 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.
  • Go to next step: If within the specified voltage range for each headlamp leveling switch position

12. Test or replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Headlamp Replacement

Headlamp Leveling Malfunction (Automatic)

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Headlamp Leveling Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Automatic Headlamp Leveling (without Electronic Suspension Control)

The automatic headlamp leveling system automatically maintains the vertical alignment of the headlamps when the vehicle load and driving conditions change. The vehicle is equipped with suspension height sensors located on the left front and left rear suspensions. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the headlamp control module. The headlamp control module receives inputs from the front and rear suspension height sensors to determine vehicle pitch. The headlamp control module calculates the difference in vehicle pitch and sends a serial data message to both headlamp leveling control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The headlamp leveling control modules responds by driving their respective headlamp leveling actuators to the position commanded by the headlamp control module.

Automatic Headlamp Leveling (with Electronic Suspension Control)

The front and rear vertical suspension acceleration sensors provide the suspension control module with suspension position information. Each sensor receives a 5 V reference, signal, and low reference circuits from the suspension control module. The vertical suspension acceleration sensors are connected to each control arm of the front and rear suspensions. As the vehicle travels, the suspension compresses and rebounds moving the vertical suspension acceleration sensors. This causes the signal output of the sensor to change. The suspension control module compares the information from all four vertical suspension acceleration sensors and adjusts the suspension as needed. The suspension control module communicates the suspension positions with the headlamp control module via serial data. The headlamp control module uses the suspension position sensor information received from the suspension control module to calculate the difference in vehicle pitch and sends a serial data message to both headlamp leveling control modules located in each headlamp assembly. The headlamp leveling control modules responds by driving their respective headlamp leveling actuators to the position commanded by the headlamp control module.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Special Tools

J-38522 Variable Signal Generator

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the low beam headlamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the low beam headlamps ON and OFF with the headlamp switch.

  • If the low beam headlamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Headlamps Malfunction

  • Go to next step: If the low beam headlamps turn ON and OFF

3. Verify the scan tool Front Leveling Position Sensor Signal parameter is between 5 % and 90 %.

  • If the parameter is not between 5 % and 90 %

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Leveling Sensor Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter is between 5 % and 90 %

4. Verify the scan tool Rear Leveling Position Sensor Signal parameter is between 5 % and 90 %.

  • If the parameter is not between 5 % and 90 %

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Leveling Sensor Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter is between 5 % and 90 %

5. Verify the left headlamp operates to the UP and DOWN positions when commanding the Left Headlamp Vertical Motor UP and DOWN with a scan tool.

  • If the left headlamp does not operate UP and DOWN

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Leveling Actuator Malfunction

  • Go to next step: If the left headlamp operates UP and DOWN

6. Verify the right headlamp operates to the UP and DOWN positions when commanding the Right Headlamp Vertical Motor UP and DOWN with a scan tool.

  • If the right headlamp does not operate UP and DOWN

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Leveling Actuator Malfunction

  • Go to next step: If the right headlamp operates UP and DOWN

7. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Headlamp Leveling Actuator Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

5. Test or replace the appropriate K26L/R Headlamp Control Module located within Headlamp Assembly.

6. Ignition ON.

7. Verify the appropriate headlamp operates to the UP and DOWN positions when commanding the appropriate Headlamp Vertical Motor UP and DOWN with a scan tool.

  • If the headlamp does not operate UP and DOWN

Test or replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

  • Go to next step: If the headlamp operates UP and DOWN

8. All OK.

Headlamp Leveling Sensor Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor, ignition ON.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and B+.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition ON.

4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If less than 4.8 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • If greater than 5.2 V
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

5. Verify the appropriate scan tool Leveling Position Sensor Signal parameter is less than 1 mm.

  • If 1 mm or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 1 mm

6. Ignition OFF.

7. Connect the red lead of the J-38522 Variable Signal Generator to the signal circuit terminal 3 and the black lead of the J-38522 Variable Signal Generator to the low reference circuit terminal 2.

8. Adjust the J-38522 Variable Signal Generator to the settings listed below:

  • Signal control to 5 V
  • Frequency control to 250 Hz
  • Duty cycle control to 60%

9. Ignition ON, verify the appropriate scan tool Leveling Position Sensor parameter is 11 mm.

  • If not 11 mm
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If 11 mm

10. Test or replace the appropriate B51 Suspension Height Sensor.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Headlamp Control Module Replacement
  • Headlamp LED Driver Module Replacement
  • Front Suspension Automatic Forward Lighting Position Sensor Replacement
  • Rear Suspension Automatic Forward Lighting Leveling Position Sensor Replacement
  • Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Replacement
  • Control Module References for Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming, and setup

INTERIOR ACCENT LIGHTING MALFUNCTION

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Interior Accent Lighting Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies battery voltage to accent lighting lamps via the accent lamp control circuit. When a door is opened the BCM applies battery voltage to the accent lamp control circuit illuminating all of the accent lighting. The accent lighting will remain illuminated until all doors are closed and the ignition is OFF. The accent lighting remains illuminated with the ignition ON.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the component with the inoperative LED backlighting. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Accent Lighting 1 ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector below at the K9 Body Control Module.
    • X7
    • X1
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate accent lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Front Side Door Map Pocket Illumination Lamp Replacement
  • Front Side Door Inside Handle Illumination Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Side Door Inside Handle Illumination Lamp Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Interior Backlighting Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Dimmer Switch Malfunction
2. Interior Backlighting Malfunction
3. Switch Indicator LED Backlighting Malfunction
4. Door Lock Indicator Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The instrument panel dimmer switch is used to increase and decrease the brightness of the interior backlighting components. The instrument panel dimmer switch provides a voltage signal to the body control module (BCM) that will increase as the brightness of the lights are increased and decrease as the brightness of the lights are decreased. The BCM provides a low reference, signal, and B+ voltage reference to the instrument panel dimmer switch. When the instrument panel dimmer switch is placed in the desired position, the dimmed voltage setting is applied from the instrument panel dimmer switch through the instrument panel dimmer switch signal circuit to the BCM. The BCM interprets the signal and applies a pulse width modulated voltage through the LED dimming 1 and dimming 2 control circuits illuminating the interior backlighting to the requested level of brightness.

The indicators/backlighting for the components listed below are controlled by the Switch Indicator LED Backlight Dimming Control Terminal 5 X1.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver (red LED indicator)
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Driver (red LED indicator)
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool LED Backlight Dimming Command parameter changes between a high percentage to a low percentage while operating the dimmer switch from high to low.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Dimmer Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the switch indictor LED's for the components listed below turn ON and OFF while turning the switches ON and OFF.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver (red LED indicator)
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Driver (red LED indicator)
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console
  • If any of the switch indicator LED's do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Switch Indicator LED Backlighting Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If all switch indicator LED's turn ON and OFF

4. Verify all backlighting components turn ON and OFF while commanding the LED Backlight Dimming ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If all backlighting components do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Interior Backlighting Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If all backlighting components turn ON and OFF

5. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Dimmer Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch, ignition ON.

2. Test for B+ between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.

  • If less than B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

3. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between B+ and the signal circuit terminal 11.

  • If the test lamp illuminates
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate

4. Test for B+ between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and the signal circuit terminal 11.

  • If less than B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

5. Test for B+ between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and the low reference circuit terminal 7.

  • If less than B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit terminal 7 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

6. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.

  • If the test lamp illuminates
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the B+ reference circuit terminal 12 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate

7. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Interior Backlighting Malfunction

NOTE: Each component with backlighting may need to be disconnected to isolate a short to voltage or short to ground. Use the schematics to identify the following:

  • Backlighting components the vehicle is equipped with
  • Each component's control and ground circuit terminals
  • Component locations on the backlighting control circuit

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the component with inoperative backlighting. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the LED Backlight Dimming ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
    • X2 terminal 8
    • X7 terminal 9
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
    • X2 terminal 8
    • X7 terminal 9
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the component with inoperative backlighting.

Switch Indicator LED Backlighting Malfunction

NOTE: Each component with backlighting may need to be disconnected to isolate a short to voltage or short to ground. Use the schematics to identify the following:

  • Backlighting components the vehicle is equipped with
  • Each component's control and ground circuit terminals
  • Component locations on the backlighting control circuit

1. Ignition OFF, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Driver

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 6 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below, ignition ON.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console

4. Place the interior backlighting dimmer switch in the HIGH position for high backlighting intensity.

5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 18
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver terminal 5
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Driver terminal 5
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console terminal 3
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

6. Place the interior backlighting dimmer switch in the LOW position for low backlighting intensity.

7. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate at FULL intensity between the appropriate control circuit listed below and ground.

  • A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly terminal 18
  • S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver terminal 5
  • S13P Door Lock Switch - Driver terminal 5
  • S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console terminal 3
  • If the test lamp illuminates at full intensity
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate at full intensity

8. Test or replace the component with the inoperative indicator.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Switch Replacement
  • Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
  • Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
  • Door Lock Switch Replacement - Driver Side
  • Parking Brake Actuator Switch Replacement
  • Radio Control Switch Replacement - Steering Wheel
  • Cruise Control Switch Replacement
  • Ignition and Start Switch Replacement
  • Head Up Display Switch Replacement
  • Roof Console Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Lights On Indicator Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Circuit/System Description

With the headlight switch in the HEADLAMP or PARKLAMP position, the appropriate headlamp switch signal circuit is grounded through the headlight switch. The body control module (BCM) then sends a serial data message to the instrument cluster requesting the instrument cluster to illuminate the lights on indicator. With the turn signal/multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM or FLASH TO PASS position the appropriate turn signal/multifunction switch signal circuit is grounded through the turn signal/multifunction switch. The BCM then sends a serial data message to the instrument cluster requesting the instrument cluster to illuminate the high beam indicator. The BCM will also request the instrument cluster to turn on the lights on indicator located in the driver information center anytime the headlamps are ON and the ignition is OFF or the driver door is opened.

Diagnostic Aids

This diagnostic procedure assumes that the headlamps operate as described in Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

  • Instrument Cluster Wiring Schematics
  • Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Testing

Lights On Indicator Malfunction

Ignition ON, command the All Indicators test ON and OFF with the scan tool, verify that the lights on indicator changes between turn ON and OFF.

  • If the lights on indicator does not illuminate during the test or remains illuminated at all times, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
  • If the lights on indicator illuminates during the test, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

High Beam Indicator Malfunction

Ignition ON, command the All Indicators test ON and OFF with the scan tool, verify that the high beam indicator changes between turn ON and OFF.

  • If the high beam indicator does not illuminate during the test or remains illuminated at all times, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
  • If the high beam indicator illuminates during the test, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

Control Module References for BCM or instrument cluster replacement, setup, and programming.

Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction
2. Headlamp Switch Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

When the headlamp switch is placed in the HEAD or PARK position, ground is applied to the park lamp switch ON signal circuit to the body control module (BCM). The BCM responds by applying voltage to the park lamps, tail lamps, and license lamps control circuits illuminating the park, tail, and license lamps.

Diagnostic Aids

When replacing a headlamp assembly, the following control modules located on each headlamp assembly are serviceable.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K26L Headlamp Control Module - Left
  • K26R Headlamp Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Park Lamp Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive while commanding the park lamps ON and OFF with the headlamp switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Headlamp Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the left park lamps turn ON and OFF when commanding the Left Park Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left park lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Park Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left park lamps turn ON and OFF

4. Verify the right park lamps turn ON and OFF when commanding the Right Park Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right park lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Park Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the right park lamps turn ON and OFF

5. Verify the license plate lamps turn ON and OFF when commanding the License Plate Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the license plate lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - License Plate Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the license plate lamps turn ON and OFF

6. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Headlamp Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close drivers door, disconnect the harness connector at the S30 Headlamp Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Test or replace the S30 Headlamp Switch.

Park Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right
  • E2LF Side Market Lamp - Left Front
  • E2RF Side Market Lamp - Right Front
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right
  • E43L Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Left
  • E43R Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Right

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 1 (with T4L)
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 1 (with T4L)
  • E2LF Side Market Lamp - Left Front terminal 2
  • E2RF Side Market Lamp - Right Front terminal 2
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 2 (with T4A)
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 2 (with T4A)
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • E43L Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • E43R Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • E2LF Side Market Lamp - Left Front terminal 1
  • E2RF Side Market Lamp - Right Front terminal 1
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 1
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 1
  • E43L Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 1
  • E43R Liftgate Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 1

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Park Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the park lamp.

License Plate Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the appropriate E7 License Plate Lamp. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each ground circuit at the socket terminal and ground.

  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit at the socket terminal and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the License Plate Lamps ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E7 License Plate Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Rear License Plate Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear Body Structure
  • Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Tail Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Rear Compartment Lamp Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Rear Compartment Lamp Malfunction
2. Trunk Release Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) applies battery voltage to the rear compartment courtesy lamp through the rear compartment lamp control circuit. When the BCM receives a rear compartment lid open input from the rear compartment lid latch, the BCM applies battery voltage to the rear compartment lamp control circuit illuminating the rear compartment courtesy lamp. In the event that the rear compartment lamp were to remain illuminated for more than 10 minutes with the ignition switch in the OFF position and no doors opened, the BCM will deactivate the rear compartment lamp control circuit to prevent total battery discharge.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Without TC2

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Rear Close Switch parameter changes between Inactive to Active when pressing the B70 Liftgate Close Switch.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing

  • Go to next step: If the parameter does change

Go to next step: Refer to Circuit/System Testing

With TC2

1. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode

2. Operate the component:Liftgate - Closed

Verify the scan tool parameter:Rear Closure Ajar Switch=Inactive

  • If not the specified state

Refer to: Circuit/System Testing Rear Hatch/Gate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5) Rear Hatch/Gate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (Without TB5)

  • Go to next step: If the specified state

3. Operate the component:Liftgate - Ajar

Verify the scan tool parameter:Rear Closure Ajar Switch=Active

  • If not the specified state

Refer to: Circuit/System Testing Rear Hatch/Gate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5) Rear Hatch/Gate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (Without TB5)

  • Go to next step: If the specified state

Go to next step: Refer to: Circuit/System Testing

Circuit/System Testing

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, trunk latch latched, disconnect the harness connector at the E8S rear compartment courtesy lamp.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If 5 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 5 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Trunk Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 body control module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 body control module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X7 harness connector at the K9 body control module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 body control module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E8S rear compartment courtesy lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Rear Compartment Courtesy Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear
  • Compartment Courtesy Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Stop Lamps Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Stop Lamps Malfunction
2. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

The brake pedal position sensor is used to sense the action of the driver application of the brake pedal.

The brake pedal position sensor provides an analog voltage signal that will increase as the brake pedal is applied. The body control module (BCM) provides a low reference signal and a 5 V reference voltage to the brake pedal position sensor. When the variable signal reaches a voltage threshold indicating the brakes have been applied, the BCM will apply battery voltage to the left and right stop lamp control circuits as well as the center high mounted stop lamp control circuit illuminating the left and right stop lamps and the center high mounted stop lamp.

Diagnostic Aids

When testing at the stop lamp bulb sockets, make sure all measurements and test lamp connections are in the correct terminal location and do not come in contact with each other during testing.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Applied parameter changes between Active and Inactive while pressing and releasing the brake pedal.

  • If the parameter does not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Brake Pedal Position Sensor Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. Verify the left brake lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Left Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left brake lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Stop Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left brake lamp turns ON and OFF

4. Verify the right brake lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Right Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right brake lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Stop Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the right brake lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Verify the center high mounted stop lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Center Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the center high mounted stop does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Center High Mount Stop Lamp Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the center high mounted stop turns ON and OFF

6. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Brake Pedal Position Sensor Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor, ignition ON.

2. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.

  • If 1 V or greater
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If less than 1 V

3. Test or replace the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor.

Stop Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E4 Turn Signal Lamp. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal B and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal A and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
    • X4 left stop lamp
    • X5 right stop lamp
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
    • X4 left stop lamp
    • X5 right stop lamp
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the appropriate E4 Turn Signal Lamp.

Center High Mount Stop Lamp Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground, ignition ON.

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Center Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Wagon) High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Hatchback)
  • Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
  • Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
  • Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Sunshade Illumination Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Reading Lamps Always OFF
2. Sunshade Lamps Always OFF
3. Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Always OFF

Circuit/System Description

The body control module (BCM) supplies the dome/reading lamps, sunshade and instrument panel compartment lamp with battery voltage. When switching on the following components the concerning lamps will illuminate:

  • Dome/reading lamps
  • Dome/reading lamps - row
  • Sunshade - left Front
  • Sunshade - right Front
  • Instrument Panel compartment lamp

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Interior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

Ignition ON, observe the lamp of the sunshade - left front/sunshade - right front while opening and closing. The lamp should illuminate when opened.

Circuit/System Testing

Sunshade Light Circuit Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate sunshade.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the C1 Battery.

3. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal B and ground.

  • If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.

4. Reconnect the negative terminal to the C1 Battery.

5. Ignition ON, test for greater than 11 V between the circuit terminal A and the ground circuit terminal B.

  • If less than the specified range, test the 12 V circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control Module.

6. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the A3L Sunshade - Left or A3R Sunshade - Right.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

  • Sunshade Replacement
  • Sunshade Support Replacement
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup, and programming

Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

1. Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction
2. Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction
3. Turn Signal Lamp Outage Detection Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Ground is applied at all times to the turn signal/multifunction switch. The turn signal lamps may only be activated with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions. When the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in either the TURN RIGHT or TURN LEFT position, ground is applied to the body control module (BCM) through either the right turn or left turn signal switch signal circuit. The BCM responds to the turn signal switch input by applying a pulsating voltage to the front and rear turn signal lamps through there respective control circuits. When a turn signal request is received by the BCM, a serial data message is sent to the instrument cluster requesting the respective turn signal indicator be pulsed ON and OFF.

Diagnostic Aids

When replacing a headlamp assembly, the following control modules located on each headlamp assembly are serviceable.

  • K189L Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Left
  • K189R Headlamp/Cornering Lamp Control Module - Right
  • K26L Headlamp Control Module - Left
  • K26R Headlamp Control Module - Right

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Right Turn Signal Switch and Left Turn Signal Switch parameters change between Active and Inactive while cycling the turn signal switch between the right and left positions.

  • If the parameters do not change

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameters change

3. Verify the left front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the Left Front Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left front turn signal lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF

4. Verify the right front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the Right Front Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right front turn signal lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the right front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF

5. Verify the left rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left rear turn signal lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF

6. Verify the right rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Right Rear Turn

  • Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

If the right rear turn signal lamp does not turn ON and OFF

  • Go to next step: If the right rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF

7. Observe the left and right turn signal lamps and turn signal indicators on the instrument cluster while activating the left and right turn signals. The left and right turn signal lamps and indicators should illuminate and flash at a normal rate when turned ON.

  • If the left and right turn signal lamps and indictors illuminate but flash in a rapid manner

Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Turn Signal Lamp Outage Detection Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left and right turn signal lamps and indictors operate normally

8. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close driver door, disconnect the harness connector at the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Left Turn Signal Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Left Turn Signal Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Verify the scan tool Right Turn Signal Switch parameter is Inactive.

If not Inactive

  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

8. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.

9. Verify the scan tool Right Turn Signal Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

10. Test or replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • E4Y Turn Signal Repeater Lamp - Left
  • E4Z Turn Signal Repeater Lamp - Right
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • E4Y Turn Signal Repeater Lamp - Left terminal 1
  • E4Z Turn Signal Repeater Lamp - Right terminal 1
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 1 (with T4A)
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 1 (with T4A)
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 2 (with T4L)
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 2 (with T4L)
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 4
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 4
  • If 10 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 10 Ω

3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • E4Y Turn Signal Repeater Lamp - Left terminal 2
  • E4Z Turn Signal Repeater Lamp - Right terminal 2
  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 5
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 5
  • E42L Tail Lamp Assembly - Left terminal 2
  • E42R Tail Lamp Assembly - Right terminal 2

4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
    • X4 right turn signals
    • X5 left turn signals
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
    • X4 right turn signals
    • X5 left turn signals
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

5. Test or replace the turn signal lamp.

Turn Signal Lamp Outage Detection Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E13 Headlamp Assembly, ignition ON.

2. Test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.

  • If not B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

3. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.

  • If the test lamp illuminates
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 10 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate

4. Test or replace the E13 Headlamp Assembly.

Turn Signal Indicators Malfunction

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the left and right turn signal indicators turn ON and OFF while commanding the All Indicators Test ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left or right turn signal indictors are always OFF or remain ON

Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.

  • Go to next step: If the left and right turn signal indictors turn ON and OFF

3. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Turn Signal Switch Replacement
  • Front Side Turn Signal Lamp Replacement
  • Headlamp Replacement
  • Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction

Diagnostic Instructions

  • Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
  • Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
  • Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.

Diagnostic Fault Information

Lighting

Lighting

1. Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction
2. Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction
3. Turn Signal Lamp Outage Detection Malfunction

Circuit/System Description

Ground is applied at all times to the turn signal/multifunction switch. The turn signal lamps may only be activated with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions. When the turn signal/multifunction switch is placed in either the TURN RIGHT or TURN LEFT position, ground is applied to the body control module (BCM) through either the right turn or left turn signal switch signal circuit. The BCM responds to the turn signal switch input by applying a pulsating voltage to the front and rear turn signal lamps through there respective control circuits. When a turn signal request is received by the BCM, a serial data message is sent to the instrument cluster requesting the respective turn signal indicator be pulsed ON and OFF.

Diagnostic Aids

When testing at the turn signal lamp bulb socket, make sure all measurements and test lamp connections are in the correct terminal location and do not come in contact with each other during testing.

Reference Information

Schematic Reference

Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation

Electrical Information Reference

  • Circuit Testing
  • Connector Repairs
  • Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
  • Wiring Repairs

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool Right Turn Signal Switch and Left Turn Signal Switch parameters change between Active and Inactive while cycling the turn signal switch between the right and left positions.

  • If the parameters do not change

Refer to Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the parameters change

3. Verify the left front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the Left Front Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left front turn signal lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF

4. Verify the right front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF while commanding the Right Front Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right front turn signal lamps do not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the right front turn signal lamps turn ON and OFF

5. Verify the left rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Left Rear Turn Signal/Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the left rear turn signal lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF

6. Verify the right rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Right Rear Turn Signal/Stop Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the right rear turn signal lamp does not turn ON and OFF

Refer to Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the right rear turn signal lamp turns ON and OFF

7. Observe the left and right turn signal lamps and turn signal indicators on the instrument cluster while activating the left and right turn signals. The left and right turn signal lamps and indicators should illuminate and flash at a normal rate when turned ON.

  • If the left and right turn signal lamps and indictors illuminate but flash in a rapid manner

Refer to Turn Signal Lamp Outage Detection Malfunction.

  • Go to next step: If the left and right turn signal lamps and indictors operate normally

8. All OK.

Circuit/System Testing

Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close driver door, disconnect the harness connector at the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 15 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

3. Ignition ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Left Turn Signal Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.

6. Verify the scan tool Left Turn Signal Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

7. Verify the scan tool Right Turn Signal Switch parameter is Inactive.

  • If not Inactive
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Inactive

8. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.

9. Verify the scan tool Right Turn Signal Switch parameter is Active.

  • If not Active
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If less than 1 V
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If Active

10. Test or replace the S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch.

Turn Signal Lamps Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.

2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 3 and ground.

  • If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F8DA fuse at the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
  • If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
  1. Ignition OFF, remove the F8DA fuse at the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates

3. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.

4. Ignition OFF, exterior lamps OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

  • A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
  • A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
  • E4LF Turn Signal Lamp - Left Front
  • E4RF Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Right Front
  • E4LR Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear
  • E4RR Turn Signal Lamp - Right Rear

5. Test for less than 15 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver terminal 5 (with DWK)
  • A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger terminal 5 (with DWK)
  • E4LF Turn Signal Lamp - Left Front terminal G
  • E4RF Turn Signal Lamp - Right Front terminal G
  • E4LR Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear terminal B
  • E4RR Turn Signal Lamp - Right Rear B
  • If 15 Ω or greater
  1. Ignition OFF.
  2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
  • Go to next step: If less than 15 Ω

6. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground, ignition ON.

  • A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver terminal 13
  • A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger terminal 13
  • E4LF Turn Signal Lamp - Left Front terminal A
  • E4RF Turn Signal Lamp - Right Front terminal A
  • E4LR Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear terminal A
  • E4RR Turn Signal Lamp - Right Rear A

7. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Turn Signal Lamp ON and OFF with a scan tool.

  • If the test lamp is always OFF
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. X5 left turn signals
  3. X4 right turn signals
  4. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  5. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • If the test lamp is always ON
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector listed below at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
    • X5 left turn signals
    • X4 right turn signals
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

8. Test or replace the turn signal lamp.

Turn Signal Lamp Outage Detection Malfunction

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below, ignition ON.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right

2. Test for B+ between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 3
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 3
  • If not B+
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
  2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
    • If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
    • Go to next step: If infinite resistance
  3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
    • If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
    • If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If B+

3. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.

  • E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left terminal 3
  • E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right terminal 3
  • If the test lamp illuminates
  1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
  2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal and ground.
    • If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
    • If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
  • Go to next step: If the test lamp does not illuminate

4. Test or replace the turn signal lamp.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

  • Turn Signal Switch Replacement
  • Front Side Turn Signal Lamp Replacement
  • Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) Rear Body Structure
  • Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Hatchback 68) or Rear Body Structure Stop Lamp Replacement (5-Door Wagon 35)
  • Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming, and setup

    READ NEXT:

     Repair Instructions

    Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure. Any movement of the brake pedal during th

     Schematic Wiring Diagrams

    HEADLIGHTS/DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) WIRING SCHEMATICS Controls and Indicators Halogen Lamps and Daytime Running Lamps (T4A) Left LED Headlamp Power, Ground and Serial Data (T4L) Left LED Low Be

     Mirrors

    SPECIFICATIONS FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications NOTE: All fasteners listed in this table can be reused after removal. SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS INSIDE REAR

    SEE MORE:

     Shift Lock Control System

    SCHEMATIC AND WIRING DIAGRAMS SHIFT LOCK CONTROL WIRING SCHEMATICS Shift Lock Control DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES DTC B270A Diagnostic Instructions Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle Review the description

     Specifications, Repair Instructions

    SPECIFICATIONS WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (4-DOOR HATCHBACK 68) Alignment Condition: Full tank of fuel, no passengers and placed on flat level surface. WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (4-DOOR STATION WAGON 35) Alignment Condition: Full tank of fuel, no passengers and placed on flat level surfa

    © 2019-2024 Copyright www.opinsb.com